ML18247A265

Revision 36 to Final Safety Analysis Report, Chapter 4, Reactor

ML18247A265
Person / Time
Site:	Millstone
Issue date:	06/18/2018
From:	Dominion Energy Nuclear Connecticut
To:	Office of Nuclear Reactor Regulation
Shared Package
ML18199A125	List: ML18199A110 ML18247A221 ML18247A222 ML18247A223 ML18247A227 ML18247A231 ML18247A232 ML18247A233 ML18247A234 ML18247A237 ML18247A238 ML18247A239 ML18247A240 ML18247A242 ML18247A248 ML18247A251 ML18247A252 ML18247A253 ML18247A254 ML18247A255 ML18247A256 ML18247A258 ML18247A259 ML18247A260 ML18247A261 ML18247A262 ML18247A263 ML18247A265 ML18247A269 ML18247A270 ML18247A271 ML18247A272 ML18247A273 ML18247A275
References
18-225
Download: ML18247A265 (269)

Text

Millstone Power Station Unit 3 Safety Analysis Report Chapter 4: Reactor

Table of Contents tion Title Page

SUMMARY

DESCRIPTION..................................................................... 4.1-1 FUEL SYSTEM DESIGN .......................................................................... 4.2-1 1 Design Bases............................................................................................... 4.2-2 1.1 Cladding...................................................................................................... 4.2-2 1.2 Fuel Material............................................................................................... 4.2-4 1.3 Fuel Rod Performance ................................................................................ 4.2-5 1.4 Spacer Grids................................................................................................ 4.2-5 1.5 Fuel Assembly ............................................................................................ 4.2-5 1.6 Incore Control Components........................................................................ 4.2-8 1.7 Surveillance Program................................................................................ 4.2-10 2 Design Description ................................................................................... 4.2-10 2.1 Fuel Rods .................................................................................................. 4.2-16 2.2 Fuel Assembly Structure........................................................................... 4.2-17 2.2.1 Bottom Nozzle .......................................................................................... 4.2-17 2.2.2 Top Nozzle................................................................................................ 4.2-18 2.2.3 Guide Thimbles and Instrument Tube ...................................................... 4.2-19 2.2.4 Grid Assemblies........................................................................................ 4.2-20 2.3 Incore Control Components...................................................................... 4.2-21 2.3.1 Full Length Rod Cluster Control Assembly (RCCA)............................... 4.2-22 2.3.2 Burnable Absorber Assembly and Integral Fuel Burnable Absorbers (IFBA) ..................................................................................... 4.2-24 2.3.3 Neutron Source Assembly ........................................................................ 4.2-25 2.3.4 Thimble Plug Assembly............................................................................ 4.2-26 3 Design Evaluation..................................................................................... 4.2-27 3.1 Cladding.................................................................................................... 4.2-27 3.2 Fuel Materials Considerations .................................................................. 4.2-31 3.3 Fuel Rod Performance .............................................................................. 4.2-32 3.4 Spacer Grids.............................................................................................. 4.2-38 3.4.1 Grid Analysis ............................................................................................ 4.2-39 28/18 4-i Rev. 31

tion Title Page 3.4.2 Nongrid Component Analyses.................................................................. 4.2-39 3.5 Fuel Assembly .......................................................................................... 4.2-40 3.5.1 Stresses and Deflections ........................................................................... 4.2-40 3.5.2 Dimensional Stability ............................................................................... 4.2-40 3.6 Reactivity Control Assembly and Burnable Absorber Rods .................... 4.2-40 4 Testing and Inspection Plan ...................................................................... 4.2-43 4.1 Quality Assurance Program: Westinghouse ............................................. 4.2-43 4.2 Quality Control: Westinghouse ................................................................ 4.2-43 4.3 Incore Control Component Testing and Inspection .................................. 4.2-46 4.4 Tests and Inspections by Others: Westinghouse....................................... 4.2-47 4.5 In-Service Surveillance............................................................................. 4.2-47 4.6 On-Site Inspection .................................................................................... 4.2-47 4.7 Testing and Inspection Plan: AREVA RCCAs......................................... 4.2-48 4.7.1 Quality Assurance Program ...................................................................... 4.2-48 4.7.2 Quality Control ......................................................................................... 4.2-48 4.7.3 Onsite Inspection ...................................................................................... 4.2-48 5 References for Section 4.2 ........................................................................ 4.2-48 NUCLEAR DESIGN .................................................................................. 4.3-1 1 Design Bases............................................................................................... 4.3-1 1.1 Fuel Burnup ................................................................................................ 4.3-2 1.2 Negative Reactivity Feedback (Reactivity Coefficient) ............................. 4.3-2 1.3 Control of Power Distribution .................................................................... 4.3-3 1.4 Maximum Controlled Reactivity Insertion Rate......................................... 4.3-4 1.5 Shutdown Margins ...................................................................................... 4.3-4 1.6 Stability....................................................................................................... 4.3-5 1.7 Anticipated Transients Without SCRAM ................................................... 4.3-6 2 Description.................................................................................................. 4.3-6 2.1 Nuclear Design Description........................................................................ 4.3-6 2.2 Power Distributions .................................................................................... 4.3-8 2.2.1 Definitions .................................................................................................. 4.3-8 28/18 4-ii Rev. 31

tion Title Page 2.2.2 Radial Power Distributions ....................................................................... 4.3-10 2.2.3 Assembly Power Distributions ................................................................. 4.3-10 2.2.4 Axial Power Distributions ........................................................................ 4.3-11 2.2.5 Local Power Peaking ................................................................................ 4.3-11 2.2.6 Limiting Power Distributions ................................................................... 4.3-12 2.2.7 Experimental Verification of Power Distribution Analysis...................... 4.3-15 2.2.8 Testing ...................................................................................................... 4.3-17 2.2.9 Monitoring Instrumentation...................................................................... 4.3-17 2.3 Reactivity Coefficients ............................................................................. 4.3-17 2.3.1 Fuel Temperature (Doppler) Coefficient .................................................. 4.3-18 2.3.2 Moderator Coefficients ............................................................................. 4.3-19 2.3.3 Power Coefficient ..................................................................................... 4.3-20 2.3.4 Comparison of Calculated and Experimental Reactivity Coefficients ............................................................................................... 4.3-20 2.3.5 Reactivity Coefficients Used in Transient Analysis ................................. 4.3-20 2.4 Control Requirements ............................................................................... 4.3-21 2.4.1 Doppler ..................................................................................................... 4.3-22 2.4.2 Variable Average Moderator Temperature............................................... 4.3-22 2.4.3 Redistribution............................................................................................ 4.3-22 2.4.4 Void Content............................................................................................. 4.3-22 2.4.5 Rod Insertion Allowance .......................................................................... 4.3-22 2.4.6 Installed Excess Reactivity for Depletion................................................. 4.3-23 2.4.7 Xenon and Samarium Poisoning............................................................... 4.3-23 2.4.8 pH Effects ................................................................................................. 4.3-23 2.4.9 Experimental Confirmation ...................................................................... 4.3-23 2.4.10 Control ...................................................................................................... 4.3-23 2.4.11 Chemical Poison ....................................................................................... 4.3-23 2.4.12 Rod Cluster Control Assemblies............................................................... 4.3-24 2.4.13 Reactor Coolant Temperature ................................................................... 4.3-25 2.4.14 Burnable Absorber Rods........................................................................... 4.3-25 2.4.15 Peak Xenon Startup .................................................................................. 4.3-25 28/18 4-iii Rev. 31

tion Title Page 2.4.16 Load Follow Control and Xenon Control ................................................. 4.3-26 2.4.17 Burnup ...................................................................................................... 4.3-26 2.5 Control Rod Patterns and Reactivity Worth ............................................. 4.3-26 2.6 Criticality of the Reactor during Refueling and Criticality of Fuel Assemblies .

4.3-28 2.7 Stability..................................................................................................... 4.3-31 2.7.1 Introduction............................................................................................... 4.3-31 2.7.2 Stability Index........................................................................................... 4.3-31 2.7.3 Prediction of the Core Stability ................................................................ 4.3-32 2.7.4 Stability Measurements............................................................................. 4.3-32 2.7.5 Comparison of Calculations with Measurements ..................................... 4.3-33 2.7.6 Stability Control and Protection ............................................................... 4.3-34 2.8 Vessel Irradiation ...................................................................................... 4.3-35 3 Analytical Methods................................................................................... 4.3-36 3.1 Fuel Temperature (Doppler) Calculations ................................................ 4.3-36 3.2 Macroscopic Group Constants.................................................................. 4.3-37 3.3 Spatial Few-Group Diffusion Calculations............................................... 4.3-38 4 References for Section 4.3 ........................................................................ 4.3-39 THERMAL AND HYDRAULIC DESIGN ............................................... 4.4-1 1 Design Bases............................................................................................... 4.4-1 1.1 Departure from Nucleate Boiling Design Basis ......................................... 4.4-1 1.2 Fuel Temperature Design Basis .................................................................. 4.4-3 1.3 Core Flow Design Basis ............................................................................. 4.4-3 1.4 Hydrodynamic Stability Design Basis ........................................................ 4.4-4 1.5 Other Considerations .................................................................................. 4.4-4 2 Description.................................................................................................. 4.4-4 2.1 Summary Comparison ................................................................................ 4.4-4 2.2 Critical Heat Flux Ratio or Departure from Nucleate Boiling Ratio and Mixing Technology ................................................................................................. 4.4-5 2.2.1 Departure from Nuclear Boiling Technology ............................................. 4.4-5 28/18 4-iv Rev. 31

tion Title Page 2.2.2 Definition of Departure from Nuclear Boiling Ratio.................................. 4.4-5 2.2.3 Mixing Technology..................................................................................... 4.4-6 2.2.4 Hot Channel Factors ................................................................................... 4.4-7 2.2.5 Effects of Rod Bow on DNBR ................................................................... 4.4-9 2.2.6 Effects of Lower Plenum Flow Anomaly on DNBR .................................. 4.4-9 2.2.7 High Quality Threshold on WRB-2M and WRB-2 .................................... 4.4-9 2.3 Linear Heat Generation Rate ...................................................................... 4.4-9 2.4 Void Fraction Distribution.......................................................................... 4.4-9 2.5 Core Coolant Flow Distribution ............................................................... 4.4-10 2.6 Core Pressure Drops and Hydraulic Loads............................................... 4.4-10 2.6.1 Core Pressure Drops ................................................................................. 4.4-10 2.6.2 Hydraulic Loads........................................................................................ 4.4-10 2.7 Correlation and Physical Data .................................................................. 4.4-10 2.7.1 Surface Heat Transfer Coefficients........................................................... 4.4-10 2.7.2 Total Core and Vessel Pressure Drop ....................................................... 4.4-11 2.7.3 Void Fraction Correlation ......................................................................... 4.4-12 2.8 Thermal Effects of Operational Transients............................................... 4.4-13 2.9 Uncertainties in Estimates ........................................................................ 4.4-13 2.9.1 Uncertainties in Fuel and Clad Temperatures........................................... 4.4-13 2.9.2 Uncertainties in Pressure Drops................................................................ 4.4-14 2.9.3 Uncertainties due to Inlet Flow Maldistribution....................................... 4.4-14 2.9.4 Uncertainty in DNB Correlation............................................................... 4.4-14 2.9.5 Uncertainties of DNBR Calculations........................................................ 4.4-14 2.9.6 Uncertainties in Flow Rates ...................................................................... 4.4-14 2.9.7 Uncertainties in Hydraulic Loads ............................................................. 4.4-15 2.9.8 Uncertainty in Mixing Coefficient............................................................ 4.4-15 2.10 Flux Tilt Considerations ........................................................................... 4.4-15 2.11 Fuel and Cladding Temperatures .............................................................. 4.4-16 2.11.1 UO2 Thermal Conductivity....................................................................... 4.4-16 2.11.2 Radial Power Distribution on UO2 Fuel Rods.......................................... 4.4-17 2.11.3 Gap Conductance ...................................................................................... 4.4-18 28/18 4-v Rev. 31

tion Title Page 2.11.4 Surface Heat Transfer Coefficients........................................................... 4.4-18 2.11.5 Fuel Clad Temperatures............................................................................ 4.4-18 2.11.6 Treatment of Peaking Factors ................................................................... 4.4-18 3 Description of the Thermal and Hydraulic Design of the Reactor Coolant Sys-tem ............................................................................................................ 4.4-19 3.1 Plant Configuration Data .......................................................................... 4.4-19 3.2 Operating Restrictions on Pumps ............................................................. 4.4-19 3.3 Power-Flow Operating Map (BWR)......................................................... 4.4-20 3.4 Temperature-Power Operating Map ......................................................... 4.4-20 3.5 Load Following Characteristics ................................................................ 4.4-20 3.6 Thermal and Hydraulic Characteristics Summary Table.......................... 4.4-20 4 Evaluation ................................................................................................. 4.4-20 4.1 Critical Heat Flux...................................................................................... 4.4-20 4.2 Core Hydraulics ........................................................................................ 4.4-20 4.2.1 Flow Paths Considered in Core Pressure Drop and Thermal Design......................................................................................... 4.4-20 4.2.2 Inlet Flow Distributions ............................................................................ 4.4-21 4.2.3 Empirical Friction Factor Correlations ..................................................... 4.4-21 4.3 Influence of Power Distribution ............................................................... 4.4-22 4.3.1 Nuclear Enthalpy Rise Hot Channel Factor, FNH ..............................................4.4-22 4.3.2 Axial Heat Flux Distributions................................................................... 4.4-23 4.4 Core Thermal Response............................................................................ 4.4-23 4.5 Analytical Techniques .............................................................................. 4.4-24 4.5.1 Core Analysis............................................................................................ 4.4-24 4.5.2 Steady State Analysis................................................................................ 4.4-24 4.5.3 Experimental Verification......................................................................... 4.4-24 4.5.4 Transient Analysis .................................................................................... 4.4-25 4.6 Hydrodynamic and Flow Power Coupled Instability ............................... 4.4-25 4.7 Fuel Rod Behavior Effects from Coolant Flow Blockage ........................ 4.4-26 5 Testing and Verification ........................................................................... 4.4-27 5.1 Test Prior to Initial Criticality................................................................... 4.4-27 28/18 4-vi Rev. 31

tion Title Page 5.2 Initial Power and Plant Operation............................................................. 4.4-28 5.3 Component and Fuel Inspections.............................................................. 4.4-28 6 Instrumentation Requirements .................................................................. 4.4-28 6.1 Incore Instrumentation .............................................................................. 4.4-28 6.2 Overtemperature and Overpower T Instrumentation ............................. 4.4-28 6.3 Instrumentation to Limit Maximum Power Output .................................. 4.4-29 6.4 Loose Parts Monitoring System................................................................ 4.4-29 6.5 Instrumentation for Detection of Inadequate Core Cooling ..................... 4.4-32 6.5.1 CE-Heated Junction Thermocouple System ............................................. 4.4-33 7 References for Section 4.4 ........................................................................ 4.4-39 REACTOR MATERIALS .......................................................................... 4.5-1 1 Control Rod System Structural Materials ................................................... 4.5-1 1.1 Materials Specifications.............................................................................. 4.5-1 1.2 Austenitic Stainless Steel Components....................................................... 4.5-2 1.3 Other Materials ........................................................................................... 4.5-3 1.4 Cleaning and Cleanliness Control............................................................... 4.5-3 2 Reactor Internals Materials ......................................................................... 4.5-4 2.1 Materials Specifications.............................................................................. 4.5-4 2.2 Controls on Welding ................................................................................... 4.5-4 2.3 Nondestructive Examination of Wrought Seamless Tubular Products and Fittings ........................................................................................................ 4.5-4 2.4 Fabrication and Processing of Austenitic Stainless Steel Components ...... 4.5-4 FUNCTIONAL DESIGN OF REACTIVITY CONTROL SYSTEMS .................................................................................................. 4.6-1 1 Information for Control Rod Drive System (CRDS).................................. 4.6-1 2 Evaluation of the CRDS ............................................................................. 4.6-1 3 Testing and Verification of the CRDS........................................................ 4.6-2 4 Information for Combined Performance of Reactivity Systems ................ 4.6-2 5 Evaluation of Combined Performance........................................................ 4.6-2 6 References for Section 4.6 .......................................................................... 4.6-2 28/18 4-vii Rev. 31

List of Tables mber Title 1 Reactor Design Parameter Table 2 Analytical Techniques In Core Design 3 Design Loading Conditions For Reactor Core Components 1 Fuel Assembly Component Stresses 1 Reactor Core Description (First Cycle) 2 Nuclear Design Parameters (First Cycle) 3 Typical Reactivity Requirements For Rod Cluster Control Assemblies 4 Omitted 5 Axial Stability Index Pressurized Water Reactor Core With A 12-Foot Height 6 Typical Neutron Flux Levels (n/cm2-sec) At Full Power 7 Typical Comparison of Measured And Calculated Doppler Defects 8 Omitted 9 Omitted 10 Typical Comparison of Measured And Calculated AG-IN-CD Rod Worth 11 Typical Comparison of Measured And Calculated Moderator Coefficients At HZP, BOL 1 Thermal And Hydraulic Design Parameters (1) 2 Void Fractions At Nominal Reactor Conditions With Design Hot Channel Factors 3 Radiation Levels From HJTC Probe (R/Hr) 28/18 4-viii Rev. 31

List of Figures mber Title 1 Fuel Assembly Cross Section 17 x 17 2 Comparison of the 17 x 17 V5H Fuel Assembly and the 17 x 17 Standard Fuel Assembly 3 17 x 17 Vantage 5-H Fuel Rod Assembly 4 Plan View 5 Grid to Thimble Attachment Joints 6 Thimble/Insert/Top Grid Sleeve Bulge Joint Geometry 7 Guide Thimble to Bottom Nozzle Joint 8 Rod Cluster Control and Drive Rod Assembly with Interfacing Components 9 Deleted by FSARCR PKG FSC 08-MP3-027 9a Full Length Rod Cluster Control Assembly (Westinghouse) 9b Full Length Rod Cluster Control Assembly and Absorber Rod (AREVA) 10 Absorber Rod (Westinghouse) 11 Burnable Absorber Assembly

-12 Not Used 13 Primary Source Assembly

-14 Not Used 14a Single Encapsulated Secondary Source Assembly 14b Double Encapsulated Secondary Source Assembly 15 Thimble Plug Assembly

-1 Fuel Loading Arrangement 2 Typical Production and Consumption of Higher Isotopes 3 Typical Boron Concentration Versus First Cycle Burnup with and without Burnable Absorber Rods 4 Typical Integral Fuel Burnable Absorber Rod Arrangement within an Assembly 5 Burnable Absorber Loading Pattern (Typical) 5a Integral Fuel Burnable Loading Pattern (Cycle 7) 28/18 4-ix Rev. 31

mber Title 6 Not Used 7 Not Used 8 Not Used 9 Not Used 10 Not Used 11 Not Used 12 Not Used 13 Not Used 14 Not Used 15 Not Used 16 Not Used 17 Comparison of a Typical Assembly Axial Power Distribution with Core Average Axial Distribution Bank D Slightly Inserted 18 Not Used 19 Not Used 20 Not Used 21 Typical Maximum Normalized FQ x Power Versus Axial Height 22 Not Used 23 Not Used 24 Typical Comparison Between Calculated and Measured Relative Fuel Assembly Power Distribution 25 Comparison of Typical Calculated and Measured Axial Shapes 26 Typical Measured Values of FQ for Full Power Rod Configurations 27 Typical Doppler Temperature Coefficient at Beginning-of-Life and End-of-Life, Cycle 1 28 Typical Doppler - Only Power Coefficient at Beginning-of-Life and End-of-Life, Cycle 1 29 Typical Doppler - Only Power Defect at Beginning-of-Life and End-of-Life, Cycle 1

28/18 4-x Rev. 31

mber Title 30 Typical Moderator Temperature Coefficient at Beginning-of-Life, Cycle 1, No Rods 31 Typical Moderator Temperature Coefficient at End-of-Life, Cycle 1 32 Typical Moderator Temperature Coefficient as a Function of Boron Concentration at Beginning-of-Life, Cycle 1, No Rods 33 Typical Hot Full Power Temperature Coefficient during Cycle 1 for the Critical Boron Concentration 34 Typical Total Power Coefficient at Beginning-of-Life and End-of-Life, Cycle 1 35 Typical Total Power Defect at Beginning-of-Life and End-of-Life, Cycle 1 36 Rod Cluster Control Assembly Pattern 37 Typical Accidental Simultaneous Withdrawal of Two Control Banks at EOL, HZP, Bank D and B Moving in the Same Plane 38 Design Trip Curve (Typical) 39 Typical Normalized Rod Worth Versus Percent Insertion, All Rods Out But One 40 Typical Axial Offset Versus Time, PWR Core with a 12 Foot Height and 121 Assemblies 41 Typical X-Y Xenon Test Thermocouple Response Quadrant Tilt Difference Versus Time 42 Typical Calculated and Measured Doppler Defect and Coefficients at BOL, 2-Loop Plant, 121 Assemblies, 12 Foot Core 1 Deleted by FSARCR PKG FSC 07-MP3-040 2 TDS Versus Reynolds Number for 26 Inch Grid Spacing 3 Typical Normalized Radial Flow and Enthalpy Distribution at 4 Foot Elevation 4 Typical Normalized Radial Flow and Enthalpy Distribution at 8 Foot Elevation 5 Typical Normalized Radial Flow and Enthalpy Distribution at 12 Foot Elevation-Core Exit 6 Deleted by FSARCR PKG FSC 07-MP3-040 7 Thermal Conductivity of UO2 (Data Corrected to 95 Percent Theoretical Density) 8 Reactor Coolant System Temperature-Percent Power Map

-9 Not Used 28/18 4-xi Rev. 31

mber Title 10 Distribution of Incore Instrumentation 11 ICC Functional Block Diagram (Train A-Train B Similar) 12 Typical Reactor Coolant Parameters Following Small Break LOCA 13 HJTCS Functional Configuration 14 Typical Probe/Sensor Configuration 15 HJTC Sensor - HJTC/Splash Shield 16 Electrical Diagram of HJTC 17 Typical Configuration (One Channel) 18 Heated Junction Thermocouple Probe Assembly 19 HJTC Probe Holder Support Tube Installation 20 HJTC Probe Pressure Boundary Installation 21 Probe Handling Hardware Configuration 28/18 4-xii Rev. 31

SUMMARY

DESCRIPTION s chapter describes: 1) the mechanical components of the reactor and reactor core, including fuel rods and fuel assemblies, 2) the nuclear design, and 3) the thermal-hydraulic design.

initial reactor core was composed of an array of 193 fuel assemblies identical in mechanical gn, but different in fuel enrichment. Within each fuel assembly, for the initial core, all fuel of the same enrichment. Three different enrichments were employed in the first core. These chments were 2.42 (Region 1), 2.90 (Region 2), and 3.40 (Region 3) weight percent.

sequent reactor cores used fuel with enrichments as noted in Table 4.1-1.

uel assembly from any region is composed of 264 fuel rods in a 17 by 17 square array. The ter position in the fuel assembly is reserved for incore instrumentation. The remaining 24 itions in the fuel assembly have guide thimbles for the rod cluster control assemblies CA's). The guide thimbles are joined to the bottom nozzles of the fuel assembly and also e to support the fuel grids. The fuel grids, including the intermediate flow mixers (IFMs),

sist of an egg-crate arrangement of interlocked straps that maintain lateral spacing between rods. The straps have spring fingers and dimples which grip and support the fuel rods. The dle grids also have coolant-mixing vanes. The fuel rods consist of slightly enriched uranium, he form of cylindrical pellets of uranium dioxide, contained in Zircaloy-4, ZIRLO, or imized ZIRLO tubing. The tubing is plugged and seal-welded at the ends to encapsulate the

. All fuel rods are pressurized internally with helium during fabrication to reduce clad creep n during operation and thereby to increase fatigue life.

ending on the position of the assembly in the core, the guide thimbles are used for RCCAs, tron source assemblies, or burnable absorber assemblies (used in Cycles 1 and 2). If none of e are required, the guide thimbles may be fitted with plugging devices to limit bypass flow or open.

bottom nozzle is a box-like structure which serves as the lower structural element of the fuel mbly and directs the coolant flow distribution to the assembly. The top nozzle assembly es as the upper structural element of the fuel assembly and provides a partial protective sing for the RCCA or other components.

RCCA's consist of 24 absorber rods fastened at the top end to a common hub or spider mbly. Each absorber rod consists of an alloy of silver-indium-cadmium (Ag-In-Cd). The al reactor core used RCCA's with hafnium as the neutron absorber. All hafnium RCCA's were oved at the end of Cycle 4. Ag-In-Cd RCCA's are clad in stainless steel, chromed stainless l or stainless steel with an ion-nitrided surface treatment. The RCCA's are used to control tively rapid changes in reactivity and to control the axial power distribution.

reactor core is cooled and moderated by light water at conditions as noted in Table 4.1-1.

uble boron in the moderator/coolant serves as a neutron absorber. The concentration of boron aried to control reactivity changes that occur relatively slowly, including the effects of fuel 28/18 4.1-1 Rev. 31

ative reactivity coefficients. Starting in Cycle 3, burnable absorbers have been in the form of a on coating on some fuel pellets called integral fuel burnable absorbers (IFBA).

nuclear design analyses establish the core locations for fresh and reinserted fuel assemblies define design parameters, such as fuel enrichments and boron concentration in the coolant.

nuclear design analyses establish that the reactor core and the reactor control system satisfy design criteria, even if the highest reactivity worth RCCA is in the fully withdrawn position.

core has inherent stability against diametral and azimuthal power oscillations. Axial power llations which may be induced by load changes and resultant transient xenon may be pressed by the use of control rods (RCCA's).

thermal-hydraulic design analyses establish that adequate heat transfer is provided between fuel clad and the reactor coolant. The thermal design takes into account local variations in ensions, power generation, flow distribution, and mixing. The mixing vanes incorporated in fuel assembly spacer grid design induce additional flow-mixing between the various flow nnels within a fuel assembly as well as between adjacent assemblies.

performance of the core is monitored by fixed neutron detectors outside of the core, movable tron detectors within the core, and thermocouples at the outlet of selected fuel assemblies. The ore nuclear instrumentation provides input to automatic control functions.

le 4.1-1 presents the principal nuclear thermal-hydraulic and mechanical design parameters of lstone 3.

analytical techniques employed in the core design are tabulated in Table 4.1-2. The hanical loading conditions considered for the core internals and components are tabulated in le 4.1-3. Specific or limiting loads considered for design purposes of the various components listed as follows: fuel assemblies in Section 4.2.1.5 and neutron absorber rods, burnable orbers, neutron source rods, and thimble plug assemblies in Section 4.2.1.6. The dynamic lyses, input forcing functions, and response loadings for the control rod drive system and tor vessel internals are presented in Sections 3.9N.4 and 3.9N.5. The effects of fuel sification have been evaluated with the methods described in Sections 4.2.1.2 and 4.4.2.11.

28/18 4.1-2 Rev. 31

TABLE 4.1-1 REACTOR DESIGN PARAMETER TABLE MPS-3 rmal and Hydraulic Design Parameters Reactor core heat output (MWt) 3,650 Reactor core heat output (106 Btu/hr) 12,454 Heat generated in fuel (percent) 97.4 System pressure, nominal (psia) 2,250 System pressure, minimum steady state (psia) 2,200 Minimum departure from nuclear boiling ratio for design transients See Table 4.4-1 DNB correlation WRB-2M

• lant Flow Total thermal flow rate (106 lb/hr) 135.3 Effective flow rate for heat transfer (106 lb/hr) 123.7 Effective flow area for heat transfer (ft2):

Full core of RFA / RFA-2 fuel 51.1 Average velocity along fuel rods (ft/sec):

Full core of RFA / RFA-2 fuel 14.5 Average inlet mass velocity (106 lb/hr-ft2):

Full core of RFA / RFA-2 fuel 2.42 lant Temperature Nominal inlet (°F) 556.4 Average rise in vessel (°F) 66.2 Average rise in core (°F) 71.6 Average in core (°F) 594.5 Average in vessel (°F) 589.5 t Transfer Active heat transfer, surface area (ft2) 59,700 Average heat flux (Btu/hr-ft2) 203,100 Maximum heat flux for normal operation (Btu/hr-ft2) 528,000 Average linear power (kW/ft) 5.827 **

28/18 4.1-3 Rev. 31

Peak linear power for normal operation (kW/ft) 15.15 Peak linear power resulting from overpower transients/operator errors, assuming a maximum overpower of 121 percent (kW/ft) 22.6 Heat flux hot channel factor (FQ) 2.60 ***

Peak fuel central temperature for prevention of centerline melt (°F) 4,700 e Mechanical Design Parameters Design RCC canless 17 x 17 Number of fuel assemblies 193 UO2 rods per assembly 264 Rod pitch (in.) 0.496 Overall dimensions (in.) 8.426 x 8.426 Fuel weight (MTU) (Typical) 87.8 Clad weight (lb) (Typical) 45,300 Number of grids per assembly 12 (RFA/RFA-2) #

Loading technique Low Leakage l Rods Number 50,952 Outside diameter (in.) 0.374 Diametral gap (in.) 0.0065 Clad thickness (in.) 0.0225 Clad material Zircaloy-4 (Regions 1 through 6)

ZIRLO (Regions 7 through 17)

Optimized ZIRLO (Beginning with Region 18) l Pellets Material UO2 sintered Density, percent of theoretical 95.0 Regions 1 - 5 95.5 Regions 6 and later Diameter (in.) 0.3225 Length (in.)

28/18 4.1-4 Rev. 31

iched Square - Regions 1-3 0.530 Standardized - Beginning with Region 4 0.387 al Blanket Original - Regions 5-6 0.545 Annular - Regions 7-10 0.462 Annular - Beginning with Region 11 0.500 Cluster Control Assemblies Neutron absorber Ag-In-Cd Cladding material Type 304 SS-cold worked (with or without chrome plating) - Westinghouse design Type 316L SS (with ion-nitrided surface treatment) - AREVA design Clad thickness 0.0185 Number of clusters, full length / part length 61/-

Number of absorber rods per cluster 24 e Structure Core barrel, I.D./O.D.(in.) 148.0 / 152.5 Reactor vessel shielding Neutron panel design Baffle thickness (in.) 0.875 cture Characteristics Core diameter, equivalent (in.) 132.7 Core height, active fuel (in.) (Cold nominal) 144 lector Thickness and Composition Top, water plus steel (in) (approximate) 10 Bottom, water plus steel (in.) (approximate) 10 Side, water plus steel (in.) (approximate) 15 H2O/U molecular ratio core, lattice, cold 2.39 l Enrichment (weight percent)

Region 1 2.42 Region 2 2.90 Region 3 3.40 28/18 4.1-5 Rev. 31

Regions 4A/4B 3.5 / 3.8 Regions 5A/5B 4.1 / 4.5 Regions 6A/6B 4.2 / 4.5 Region 7 4.4 Region 8 4.6 Regions 9A / 9B 4.4 / 4.8 Regions 10A / 10B 4.4 / 4.8 Regions 11A / 11B 4.2 / 4.7 Regions 12A / 12B / 12C 4.7 / 4.95 / 4.95 Regions 13A / 13B 4.0 / 4.95 Regions 14A / 14B 4.7 / 4.95 Beginning with Region 15 (Cycle 13) The reload region is a split-batch with typical fuel assembly enrichments of 4.10 and 4.95 weight percent.

TES:

• The ABB-NV, W-3, and/or WRB-2 Correlations are used for analyses in which the WRB-2M correlation is not applicable.

• • Based on an average active fuel stack height of 143.7 in.

• • • This is the maximum value of FQ for normal operation.

1. Includes the protective bottom grid (P-grid) (Regions 9-16) or Robust Protective Grid (RPG) (starting with Region 17) which is a feature of the RFA/RFA-2.

28/18 4.1-6 Rev. 31

Section Analysis Technique Computer Code Reference Mechanical design of core Static and Dynamic Modeling MULTIFLEX, FORCE 2, 3.7(N).2.1 internals loads, deflections, LATFORC, finite element, 3.9N.2 and stress analysis structural analysis code, and others 3.9N.3 Fuel rod design Full performance Semi-empirical thermal model of fuel rod with Westinghouse fuel rod design 4.2.1.1 characteristics consideration of fuel density, changes, heat model 4.2.3.2 (temperature, internal transfer, fission gas release, etc.

pressure, clad stress, etc. 4.2.3.3 4.3.3.1 4.4.2.11 Nuclear design

1. Cross sections and group Microscopic data; macroscopic constants for Modified ENDF/BV library 4.3.3.2 constants homogenized core regions PHOENIX-P type 4.3.3.2 Group constants for control rods with PHOENIX-P 4.3.3.2 self-shielding

2. X-Y and X-Y-Z power 2-group nodal theory ANC 4.3.3.3 distributions, fuel depletion critical boron concentrations, X-Y and X-Y-Z xenon distributions, reactivity coefficients 06/28/18 4.1-7 Rev. 31

Section Analysis Technique Computer Code Reference

3. Axial power distributions, 1-D, 2-group diffusion theory APOLLO 4.3.3.3 control rod worths, and axial xenon distribution

4. Fuel rod power Integral transport theory LASER 4.3.3.1 Effective resonance Monte Carlo weighting function FIGHT-H temperature

5. Criticality of reactor and 3-D Monte Carlo theory AMPX system of codes, KENO- 4.3.2.6 fuel assemblies Va.

6. Vessel irradiation Multi-group spatial dependent transport theory DOT 4.3.2.8 Thermal-hydraulic design

1. Steady state Subchannel analysis of local fluid conditions in VIPRE-01 4.4.4.5.2 rod bundles, including inertial and cross-flow resistance terms, solution progresses from corewide to hot assembly to hot channel

2. Transient Subchannel analysis of local fluid conditions VIPRE-01 4.4.4.5.4 based on time dependent system conditions 06/28/18 4.1-8 Rev. 31

TABLE 4.1-3 DESIGN LOADING CONDITIONS FOR REACTOR CORE COMPONENTS Fuel assembly weight and core component weights, (BPs, sources, plugging devices).

Fuel assembly spring forces and core component spring forces.

Internals weight.

Control rod trip (equivalent static load).

Differential pressure.

Spring preloads.

Coolant flow forces (static).

Temperature gradients.

Differences in thermal expansion.

a. Due to temperature differences

b. Due to expansion of different materials.

Interference between components.

Vibration (mechanically or hydraulically induced).

One or more loops out of service.

All operational transients listed in Table 3.9N-1.

Pump overspeed.

Seismic loads (Operating Basis Earthquake and Safe Shutdown Earthquake).

Blowdown forces (due to cold and hot leg break).

28/18 4.1-9 Rev. 31

nt conditions for design are divided into four categories in accordance with their anticipated uency of occurrence and risk to the public: Condition I - Normal Operation; Condition II -

dents of Moderate Frequency; Condition III - Infrequent Incidents; Condition IV - Limiting lts. Chapter 15 describes bases and plant operation and events involving each condition.

reactor is designed so that its components meet the following performance and safety criteria:

1. The mechanical design of the reactor core components and their physical arrangement, together with corrective actions of the reactor control, protection, and emergency cooling systems (when applicable), ensure that:

a. Fuel damage will not occur during Condition I and Condition II events.

(Fuel damage, as used here, is defined as penetration of the fission product barrier, i.e., the fuel rod clad.) It is not possible, however, to preclude a very small number of rod failures. These failures are within the capability of the plant cleanup system and are consistent with plant design bases.

b. The reactor can be brought to a safe state following a Condition III event with only a small number of fuel rods damaged, although sufficient fuel damage might occur to preclude immediate resumption of operation. (In any case, the fraction of fuel rods damaged must be limited so as to meet the dose guidelines of 10 CFR 100).

c. The reactor can be brought to a safe state and the core can be kept subcritical with acceptable heat transfer geometry following transients arising from Condition IV events.

2. Fuel assemblies are designed to withstand loads induced during shipping, handling, and core loading without exceeding the criteria of Section 4.2.1.5.

3. Fuel assemblies are designed to accept control rod insertions to provide the required reactivity control for power operations and reactivity shutdown conditions.

4. All fuel assemblies have provisions for the insertion of incore instrumentation necessary for plant operation.

5. The reactor internals, in conjunction with the fuel assemblies and incore control components, direct reactor coolant through the core to achieve acceptable flow distribution and to restrict bypass flow to assure heat transfer performance requirements for all modes of operation. Other thermal and hydraulic design concerns such as fuel uplift, crud deposition, and fuel clad temperatures are discussed in Section 4.4.

28/18 4.2-1 Rev. 31

the 17 x 17 STD, V5H, RFA/RFA-2 fuel assemblies, Next Generation Fuel (NGF) Lead Test emblies (LTAs), and 17 x 17 RFA-2 with AXIOM fuel cladding LTAs the fuel rod and fuel mbly design bases are established to satisfy the general performance and safety criteria ented in Section 4.2.

fuel rods from Regions 1 through 4 are designed for a rod pellet burnup of approximately 00 megawatt days per metric ton of uranium (MWD/MTU) in the fuel cycle equilibrium dition. Starting from fuel Region 5, the design peak rod burnup is increased to approximately 00 MWD/MTU.

detailed fuel rod design establishes parameters that include pellet size and density, clad/pellet metral gap, gas plenum size, and helium prepressurization level. The design also considers cts such as fuel density changes, fission gas release, clad creep, and other physical properties ch vary with burnup. The fuel rods are designed to prevent excessive fuel temperatures ction 4.2.1.2), excessive internal rod gas pressures (Section 4.2.1.3) due to fission gas releases, excessive cladding stresses, strains, and strain fatigue (Section 4.2.1.1). This is achieved by gning the fuel rods so that the conservative design bases in the following subsections are sfied during Condition I and Condition II events over the fuel lifetime. For each design basis, performance of the limiting fuel rod must not exceed the limits specified by the design basis.

grity of the fuel assembly structure is ensured by setting limits on stresses and deformations to various loads and by preventing the assembly structure from interfering with the ctioning of other components. Three types of loads are considered:

1. Nonoperational loads such as those due to shipping and handling

2. Normal and abnormal loads defined for Conditions I and II

3. Abnormal loads defined for Conditions III and IV design bases for the incore control components are described in Section 4.2.1.6.

er supplemental fuel design criteria/limits are given in References 4.2-21 and 4.2-22.

1.1 Cladding

1. Materials and Mechanical Properties Zircaloy-4, ZIRLO or Optimized ZIRLO tubing combine neutron economy (low absorption cross section); high corrosion resistance to coolant, fuel, and fission products; and high strength and ductility at operating temperatures. Optimized ZIRLO fuel rod cladding is implemented because it provides improved corrosion resistance as compared to ZIRLO. Optimized ZIRLO fuel rod cladding has a lower tin content than ZIRLO and the thermal and mechanical processing of the cladding 28/18 4.2-2 Rev. 31

corrosion of Optimized ZIRLO cladding extends the operational capability of the cladding. Reference 4.2-6 documents the operating experience with Zicaloy-4, ZIRLO or Optimized ZIRLO tubing as a clad material. Information on the materials chemical and mechanical properties of the cladding is given in References 4.2-15 and 4.2-23. Reference 4.2-31 describes the optimization of the material composition of the licensed material ZIRLO to an Optimized (low tin)

ZIRLO composition used in the cladding of the NGF LTAs (Region 12C).

Optimized ZIRLO was implemented for full-region applications starting with Region 18. Reference 4.2-36 describes the Westinghouse cladding corrosion model that is used to analyze the corrosion of ZIRLO and Optimized ZIRLO cladding as part of the fuel rod design analysis.

The AXIOM alloy used in the fuel cladding of the AXIOM LTAs (Region 21) has a reduced tin content as compared to Optimized ZIRLO which leads to an increased reduction in corrosion. Further optimization in the thermal and mechanical processing for the AXIOM alloy as well as additional alloying elements results in improved hydrogen pickup.

2. Stress-strain Limits

a. Clad Stress - The clad stresses under Conditions I and II are less than the Zicaloy-4, ZIRLO or Optimized ZIRLO tubing yield stress, with due consideration of temperature and irradiation effects. While the clad has some capability for accommodating plastic strain, the yield stress has been accepted as a conservative design basis.

b. Clad Tensile Strain - The total tensile creep strain is less than 1 percent from the unirradiated condition. The cluster tensile strain during a transient is less than 1 percent from the pretransient value. This limit is consistent with proven practice Reference 4.2-6.

Alternatively, clad stress can be evaluated by applying the following NRC approved cladding stress criteria (Reference 4.2-35):

i. The maximum cladding stress intensities, excluding pellet cladding interaction, but accounting for cladding corrosion as a loss of load carrying metal, is less than the stress limit, as defined based on the ASME Code,Section III calculations.

ii. The one-percent transient clad strain criterion is met.

iii. An additional steady-state clad strain criterion based on the total (plastic plus elastic strain) is met.

28/18 4.2-3 Rev. 31

v. The effect of the plastic deformation is accounted for in all fuel rod design criteria as appropriate.

3. Vibration and Fatigue

a. Strain Fatigue - The cumulative strain fatigue cycles are less than the design strain fatigue life. This basis is consistent with proven practice Reference 4.2-6.

b. Vibration - Potential fretting wear due to vibration is prevented, assuring that the stress-strain limits are not exceeded during design life. Fretting of the clad surface can occur due to flow-induced vibration between the fuel rods and fuel assembly grid springs. Vibration and fretting forces vary during the fuel life due to clad diameter creepdown combined with grid spring relaxation.

4. Chemical Properties Chemical properties of the cladding are discussed in References 4.2-15 and 4.2-23.

1.2 Fuel Material

1. Thermal-physical Properties Fuel pellet temperatures - The center temperature of the hottest pellet is below the melting temperature of the UO2 melting point of 5,080°F (Reference 4.2-15, unirradiated and decreasing by 58°F per 10,000 MWD/MTU). While a limited amount of center melting can be tolerated, the design conservatively precludes center melting. A calculated fuel centerline temperature of 4,700°F has been selected as an overpower limit to ensure no fuel melting. This provides sufficient margin for uncertainties as described in Section 4.4.2.9.

The normal design density of the fuel is 95 percent of theoretical. Additional information on fuel properties is given in Reference 4.2-15.

2. Fuel Densification and Fission Product Swelling The design bases and models used for fuel densification and swelling are provided by References 4.2-7 and 4.2-21.

3. Chemical Properties Reference 4.2-15 indicates that no adverse chemical interactions occur between the fuel and its adjacent material.

28/18 4.2-4 Rev. 31

1. Fuel Rod Methods and Models The basic fuel rod methods and models and the ability to predict operating characteristics are given by References 4.2-19, 4.2-21, 4.2-23, 4.2-32, 4.2-34, 4.2-36 and Section 4.2.3.

2. Mechanical Design Limits Cladding collapse shall be precluded during the fuel rod design lifetime. The models described by Reference 4.2-25 are used for this evaluation.

The rod internal gas pressure remains below the value which causes the fuel/clad diametral gap to increase due to outward cladding creep during steady state operation. Rod pressure is also limited such that extensive departure from nucleate boiling (DNB) propagation does not occur during normal operation or any accident event. Reference 4.2-14 shows that the DNB propagation criteria are satisfied.

1.4 Spacer Grids

1. Mechanical Limits and Materials Properties The grid component strength criteria are based on experimental tests. The allowable limit (P) is established as the lower 95 percent confidence in the true mean at BOL condition at 600°F. If P is exceeded, the core must maintain a geometry amenable to cooling. As an integral part of the fuel assembly structure, the grids satisfy the applicable fuel assembly design bases and limits defined in Section 4.2.1.5.

The grid material and chemical properties are given by Reference 4.2-15. ZIRLO grid material and chemical properties are covered by Reference 4.2-23.

Reference 4.2-31 describes the optimization of the material composition of the licensed material ZIRLO to an Optimized (low tin) ZIRLO composition used in the mid-grids and Intermediate Flow Mixing grids (Fins) of the NGF LTAs.

2. Vibration and Fatigue The grids provide sufficient fuel rod support to limit fuel rod vibration and maintain clad fretting wear to within acceptable limits (defined in Section 4.2.1.1).

1.5 Fuel Assembly

1. Structural Design 28/18 4.2-5 Rev. 31

various nonoperational, operational, and accident loads. These limit bases are applied to the design and evaluation of the top and bottom nozzles, guide thimbles, grids, and thimble joints.

The design bases for evaluating the structural integrity of the fuel assemblies are:

a. Nonoperational - 4g axial and 6g lateral loading with dimensional stability.

b. For the normal operating and upset conditions, the fuel assembly component structural design criteria are established for the two primary material categories, namely austenitic stainless steels and Zircaloy/ZIRLO.

The stress categories and strength theory presented in the American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code,Section III, are used as a general guide. The maximum shear-theory (Tresca criterion) for combined stresses determines the stress intensities for the austenitic stainless steel components. The stress intensity is defined as the numerically largest difference between the various principal stresses in a three dimensional field. The allowable stress intensity value for austenitic stainless steel, such as nickel-chromium-iron alloys, is given by the lowest of the following:

1. One-third of the specified minimum tensile strength or two-thirds of the specified minimum yield strength at room temperature;

2. One-third of the tensile strength or 90 percent of the yield strength at temperature but not to exceed two-thirds of the specified minimum yield strength at room temperature.

The stress limits for the austenitic stainless steel components are given below. All stress nomenclature is per the ASME Code,Section III.

Stress Intensity Limits Categories Limit General primary membrane stress intensity Sm Local primary membrane stress intensity 1.5 Sm Primary membrane plus bending stress intensity 1.5 Sm Total primary plus secondary stress intensity 3.0 Sm 28/18 4.2-6 Rev. 31

categories because of material differences and functional requirements. Fuel tube design criteria is discussed in Section 4.2.1.1. The maximum shear theory evaluates the guide thimble design. For conservative purposes, the Zircaloy/ZIRLO unirradiated properties define stress limits.

3. Abnormal loads during Conditions III or IV - worst cases represented by combined seismic and blowdown loads.

a. Deflections of component failures cannot interfere with the reactor shutdown or emergency cooling of the fuel rods.

b. The fuel assembly structural component stresses under faulted conditions are evaluated using primarily the methods outlined in Appendix F of the ASME Code,Section III. Since the current analytical methods utilize elastic analysis, the stress allowables are defined as the smaller value of 2.4 Sm or 0.70 S for primary membrane and 3.6 Sm or 1.05 S for primary membrane plus primary bending. For the austenitic stainless steel fuel assembly components, the stress intensity is defined in accordance with the rules described in the previous section for normal operating conditions. For the Zircaloy/ZIRLO components the stress intensity limits are set at two-thirds of the material yield strength, S at reactor operating temperature. This results in Zircaloy/ZIRLO stress limits being smaller than 1.6 S or 0.70 S for primary membrane and 2.4 S or 1.05 S for primary membrane plus bending. For conservative purposes, the Zircaloy/ZIRLO unirradiated properties are used to define the stress limits.

The material and chemical properties of the fuel assembly components are given by Reference 4.2-15. Section 4.2.3.4 discusses the spacer grid crush testing. ZIRLO grid material and chemical properties are covered by Reference 4.2-23.

c. Thermal-hydraulic design is discussed in Section 4.4.

implementation of Reference 4.2-30 for Cycle 10 is a change to the fuel evaluation hodolgy, which replaces the hydrogen content design criterion for fuel assembly structural ponents with a structural component stress criterion that accounts for material thinning due to osion. The implementation of Reference 4.2-36 in Cycle 17 provides the revised cladding osion model to analyze ZIRLO and Optimized ZIRLO cladding in the fuel rod design analysis cycle-specific basis.

28/18 4.2-7 Rev. 31

control components are subdivided into permanent and temporary devices.

permanent components are the rod cluster control assemblies and secondary neutron source mblies. The temporary components are the burnable poison assemblies and the primary tron source assemblies which are normally used only in the initial core and thimble plug mblies.

erials are selected for compatibility in a pressurized water reactor environment, for adequate hanical properties at room and operating temperatures, for resistance to adverse property nges in a radioactive environment, and for compatibility with interfacing components.

erial properties are given in Reference 4.2-15. Identical absorber material (Ag-In-Cd) is zed by both Westinghouse and AREVA and the properties are applicable to both vendors gns. ZIRLO grid material and chemical properties are covered by Reference 4.2-23.

design bases for each of the mentioned components are given in the following subsections.

1. Absorber Rods For Conditions I and II the stress categories and strength theory presented in the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code,Section III, Subsection NG-3000, are used as a general guide in the design of the control rod cladding.

Design conditions which are considered under the ASME Code,Section III are as follows:

a. External pressure equal to the reactor coolant system operating pressure with appropriate allowance for overpressure transients

b. Wear allowance equivalent to 1,000 reactor trips

c. Bending of the rod due to a misalignment in the guide tube

d. Forces imposed on the rods during rod drop

e. Loads imposed by the accelerations of the control rod drive mechanism

f. Radiation exposure during maximum core life The absorber material temperature does not exceed its melting temperature

- 1,454°F for silver-indium-cadmium (Ag-In-Cd) absorber material or 3,913°F for hafnium (Reference 4.2-15).

g. Temperature effects at operating conditions 28/18 4.2-8 Rev. 31

Burnable absorber rods were used only in Cycles 1 and 2.

For Conditions I and II the stress categories and strength theory presented in the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code,Section III, Subsection NB-3000, are used as a general guide in the design of the burnable poison cladding. For abnormal loads during Conditions III and IV, code stresses are not considered limiting.

Failure of the burnable absorber rods during these conditions must not interfere with reactor shutdown or cooling of the fuel rods.

The burnable poison absorber material is nonstructural. The structural elements of the burnable absorber rod maintain the absorber geometry even if the absorber material is fractured. The rods are designed to maintain the absorber material below its softening temperature (1,492°F for reference 12.5 weight percent boron rods). (Borosilicate glass is the absorber material used in burnable absorber rods.

The softening temperature, as defined in the ASTM C 338, is 1,510 +/-18°F). In addition, the structural elements prevent excessive slumping.

3. Neutron Source Rods The neutron source rods withstand the following conditions:

a. The external pressure equal to the reactor coolant system operating pressure with appropriate allowance for overpressure transients

b. An internal pressure equal to the pressure generated by released gases over the source rod life

4. Thimble Plug Assembly The thimble plug assembly restricts bypass flow through thimbles not occupied by absorber, source, or burnable absorber rods.

The thimble plug assemblies:

a. Accommodate the differential thermal expansion between the fuel assembly and the core internals

b. Maintain positive contact with the fuel assembly and the core internals

c. Limit the flow through each occupied thimble to acceptable design value 28/18 4.2-9 Rev. 31

tion 4.2.4.5 and Sections 8 and 23 of Reference 4.2-13, discuss the ongoing testing and fuel eillance operational experience program to verify the adequacy of the fuel performance and gn bases. Fuel surveillance and testing results are used to improve fuel rod design and ufacturing processes and to be sure that design bases and safety criteria are satisfied.

2 DESIGN DESCRIPTION h fuel assembly is a 17 x 17 lattice consisting of 264 fuel rods, 24 guide thimble tubes, and instrumentation thimble tube arranged within a supporting structure. The instrumentation ble is located in the center position and provides a channel for insertion of an incore neutron ctor, if the fuel assembly is located in an instrumented core position. The guide thimbles vide channels for insertion of either a rod cluster control assembly, a neutron source assembly, thimble plug assembly, depending on the position of the particular fuel assembly in the core.

ure 4.2-1 shows a cross section of the fuel assembly array, and Figure 4.2-2 shows a fuel mbly full-length view. The fuel rods are loaded into the fuel assembly structure so that there is rance between the fuel rod ends and the top and bottom nozzles.

l assemblies are installed vertically in the reactor vessel and stand upright on the lower core e, which is fitted with alignment pins to locate and orient each assembly. After all fuel mblies are set in place, the upper support structure is installed. Alignment pins, built into the er core plate, engage and locate the upper ends of the fuel assemblies. The upper core plate bears downward against the hold-down springs on the top nozzle of each fuel assembly to d the fuel assemblies in place.

roper orientation of fuel assemblies within the core is prevented by the use of an indexing in one corner of the top nozzle top plate. The assembly is oriented with respect to the dling tool and the core by means of a pin which is inserted into this indexing hole. Visual firmation of proper orientation is also provided by an engraved identification number on the osite corner clamp.

his section, information is provided related to the fuel assembly designs and the history of their lementation. In summary, the evolution of fuel assembly designs has been:

• 17 x 17 Standard (STD) fuel assembly - initial core

• Vantage 5H (V5H) - starting in Cycle 4

• V5H with rotated grids - starting in Cycle 5

• Robust Fuel Assembly (RFA) - starting in Cycle 7

• RFA with redesigned mid-grids (RFA-2) - starting in Cycle 10 28/18 4.2-10 Rev. 31

• RFA-2 with Robust Protective Grid and Standardized Debris Filter Bottom Nozzle - starting in Cycle 15

• RFA-2 with Westinghouse Integral Nozzle (WIN) top nozzle - starting in Cycle 18

• AXIOM fuel cladding Lead Test Assembly Program - Cycles 19 through 21 ctor design parameters, including a history of fuel enrichments and information specific to the A/RFA-2 design, are provided in Table 4.1-1.

initial reactor core (Cycle 1) was entirely comprised of Westinghouse 17 x 17 Standard D) fuel assemblies. The initial core contained Region 1, Region 2, and Region 3 fuel mblies which were identical in mechanical design but different in enrichment. Tables 4.1-1 4.3-3 provide fuel assembly and fuel rod information for the initial core.

Region 4 (Cycle 2) and Region 5 (Cycle 3) fuel products were also of the Westinghouse 17 STD design but they were considered as transition designs, gradually incorporating the ous improvements of the Vantage 5 Hybrid (V5H) fuel assembly design (see below).

Vantage 5 Hybrid (V5H) fuel assembly was used starting in Region 6 (Cycle 4). This design loyed many improvements over the fuel assemblies used in the first core such as (1) dardized (chamfered) fuel pellets, (2) a reconstitutable top nozzle (RTN), (3) debris filter om nozzle (DFBN), (4) zircaloy mid-span structural grids, (5) high burnup capability, (6) gral fuel burnable absorbers (IFBA), (7) axial blankets, and (8) intermediate flow mixer grids.

se features are discussed in more detail in later sections.

V5H design was further improved for Region 7 (Cycle 5) by: (1) the use of ZIRLO to replace h of the Zircaloy-4, (2) the use of enriched B-10 in the IFBA and (3) the use of annular axial kets. Recaging of 48 of the 84 Region 7 fuel assemblies was performed prior to use in the

, whereby the odd numbered mixing vane grids were rotated 90° in the clockwise direction.

refore, grid #3 and each of the three intermediate flow mixer (IFM) grids were rotated. This dification was performed to minimize the susceptibility of these fuel assemblies to flow-uced vibration. The V5H design for Region 8 (Cycle 6) included minor mechanical difications to the V5H fuel assembly and the mixing vane grid rotation was implemented on all uel assemblies.

Robust Fuel Assembly (RFA) was used starting in Region 9 (Cycle 7). The mechanical gn of the Region 9 (RFA) fuel assemblies is the same as that of the Region 8 (V5H) fuel mblies, except for the following improvements: (1) RFA design features, (2) 3-tab top and om Inconel grids, (3) protective bottom grid, (4) composite cast top nozzle, and (5) longer top 28/18 4.2-11 Rev. 31

1. The RFA design features include a thicker wall guide thimble tube, thicker wall instrumentation tube, Modified Low Pressure Drop (LPD) mid-grids, and Modified Intermediate Flow Mixer (IFM) grids.

Guide thimble and instrumentation tube wall thickness is increased to improve stiffness and mitigate Incomplete Rod Insertion (IRI). The major diameter section OD is increased from 0.474 inch to 0.482 inch while the ID is maintained at 0.442 inch. The dashpot section OD is increased from 0.430 inch to 0.439 inch while the ID is maintained at 0.397 inch. With the thicker guide thimble tube, the cross-sectional area is increased by 26% in the major diameter section and by 29%

in the dashpot section.

The Modified LPD and Modified IFM grids are described in transmittals to the U.S. NRC (Kitchen, Liparulo). Since the RFA has a thicker guide thimble tube (0.482 inch OD), the Modified LPD mid-grid will also be embossed (radial) to accept the larger tube OD. In addition, the sleeve and the sleeve notch on the strap will also be larger to provide clearance for the larger diameter guide thimble tube.

This improvement also addresses high thimble tube loading forces during skeleton fabrication. The Modified LPD grids and the Modified IFM grids no longer required mid-grid rotations.

2. The top and bottom Inconel grids have changed from a single twist tab at the center of the inner-to-outer strap joint to a 3-tab inner-to-outer joint configuration.

The 3-tab design has one smaller twist tab and two additional tabs at the top and bottom of the strap. This change is intended to improve the structural integrity and enhance the anti-snag resistance of the top and bottom grids.

3. Debris mitigating features in the RFA include a protective bottom grid and modified fuel rod end plugs. The protective bottom grid is a partial height grid similar in configuration to the mid-grid, but fabricated of Inconel without mixing vanes. It is positioned on the top plate of the bottom nozzle. The grooved fuel rod end plug is an elongated version of the current fuel rod end plug design and extends through the protective bottom grid to the bottom grid. This longer fuel rod end plug design ensures that any debris trapped by the protective bottom grid can only fret against a solid end plug instead of the fuel rod cladding.

Hydraulic testing indicates that the design of the protective bottom grid and the elongated end plug causes no significant effect on fuel assembly hydraulic performance (Brown). In addition to the debris mitigation feature, the protective grid also provides increased support to the fuel rods.

4. A composite cast top nozzle is included in the RFA as a manufacturing process change. The new design includes a single casting that replaces the machined top 28/18 4.2-12 Rev. 31

design.

5. In conjunction with the protective grid and the new elongated bottom end plug (see Item 3 above), the fuel rod top end plug was elongated and fitted with an external gripper to assist in positioning the fuel rod during fabrication and also to facilitate fuel rod removal during reconstitution. The pre-welded design of the fuel rod top and bottom end plugs has been changed to include a groove around the circumference of the plug for the feed region. The improved top and bottom end plugs allow a greater depth of weld penetration.

mechanical design of the Region 11 (Cycle 9) RFA is essentially the same as that of the ion 9 and 10 fuel assemblies, but also included:

1. Top nozzle instrumentation tube plug elimination,

2. Bead blasted Inconel-718 top nozzle spring screws and revised spring screw design,

3. Longer fuel tube design,

4. Longer guide tube and instrumentation tubes and V+2 leaf spring,

5. Intermediate Flow Mixer Grids (IFMs) strap item reduction,

6. Shorter top end plug without gripper, and

7. Longer plenum spring.

escription of each of these RFA fuel design improvements in Region 11 follows.

1. The elimination of the top nozzle instrumentation plug is a design change that reduces the total number of component parts required to fabricate and assemble a 17 x 17 fuel assembly. The new design eliminates the instrumentation plug that has to be welded into a counterbore in the top nozzle adapter plate and replaces it with a blind hole with a small weep hole that is machined into the top nozzle adapter plate. The purpose of this change is for a manufacturing process improvement to increase manufacturing flexibility. The design change meets all functional and design requirements specified for the top nozzle and does not adversely affect the form, fit or function of the fuel assembly.

2. Changes have been made to the Inconel top nozzle spring screw to increase resistance to primary water stress corrosion cracking (PWSCC). The spring screw is bead blasted (shot peened) in the shank-to-thread area to create an even layer of metal in residual compressive stress which will inhibit the initiation and 28/18 4.2-13 Rev. 31

Finally, the material was changed from Inconel Alloy 600 to precipitation hardened Inconel-718 to increase yield and tensile strength.

3. The fuel tube length has been increased slightly to increase plenum volume and thus provide additional margin to the rod internal pressure limit at high burnup.

4. Compared to the current ZIRLO fuel assembly, the guide tube and instrumentation tube are slightly longer. As part of the increase in fuel rod length, as discussed in Section 2.1.3, the fuel assembly overall length had to be increased slightly to accommodate the fuel rod growth. The design change meets all current design criteria for high burnup operations. In addition, the leaf spring design has been changed to accommodate the longer fuel assembly length and the pre-load has been eliminated to improve the loading on the top nozzle spring screws.

5. A generic product change is being implemented in the IFM grid strap for all 17 x 17 fuel designs. This product change involves elimination of half of the IFM inner strap configurations. The primary reason for this change is to improve the manufacturing process of the IFM grid design. There will be no impact on the grid performance or on safety analyses.

6. Incorporation of the shorter top end plug results in a slight fuel rod length reduction to provide additional growth margin. Elimination of the gripper is of no consequence to design or manufacturing.

7. Since the fuel tube has been lengthened, the plenum spring has been increased slightly to accommodate the added fuel tube length. The increased plenum spring free length still maintains the same 4g design criterion as the previous design fuel regions.

ting with Region 12 (Cycle 10) a version of the Robust Fuel Assembly, called RFA-2, was d which included mid-grids with a revised design. The RFA-2 mid-gird is designed to vide increased margin to fuel rod fretting wear while maintaining the performance of the RFA reas such as DNB and pressure drop. The design differences and similarities between the RFA ion 11 (Cycle 9) and the RFA-2 are summarized as follows:

1. Changes were made to the profiles of the springs and dimples in the mid-grids (6 mid-grids per fuel assembly) of the RFA-2 fuel assembly resulting in an increase in the spring-to-fuel rod contact area and the dimple-to-fuel rod contact area as compared to the RFA. Additionally, the spring and dimple slots (i.e., the cut-outs in the grid strap material) were revised so that the overall cell stiffness for the RFA-2 is equivalent to or lower than that of the RFA. Further discussion is provided in Section 4.2.2.2.4.

28/18 4.2-14 Rev. 31

3. The Inconel top, bottom and protective bottom grids and the ZIRLO IFM grids are not changed in the 17 x 17 RFA-2 design as compared to the RFA.

4. There is no change to the Removable Top Nozzle (RTN), the Debris Filter Bottom Nozzle (DFBN), or the ZIRLO thimble and instrument tubes in the 17 x 17 RFA-2 design as compared to the RFA.

ead Test Assembly (LTA) program was initiated in Cycle 10 which involved eight Next eration Fuel (NGF) fuel assemblies. The eight LTAs were first inserted in the Cycle 10 core all eight LTAs were subsequently inserted in the Cycle 11 core for a second cycle of ration. For Cycle 12, five of the LTAs were inserted for a third cycle of operation while the aining three LTAs were discharged to the spent fuel pool. The purpose of the LTA program to demonstrate the mechanical performance of the NGF fuel assemblies with respect to roved resistance to corrosion and grid-to-rod fretting, resistance to fuel assembly bowing and roved flow mixing. The LTA program involved only the Cycle 10, 11, and 12 cores. No NGF assemblies are installed in Cycle 13 and beyond.

mechanical design of the RFA-2 fuel assembly that is used starting with Region 17 (Cycle is essentially the same as that of the Region 12 through 16 (Cycle 10-14) RFA-2 design with following two exceptions:

1. Starting with Region 17 (Cycle 15) the Standardized Debris Filter Bottom Nozzle (SDFBN) replaces the DFBN which has been used since Cycle 4 (Region 6). The SDFBN was developed for Westinghouse 17x17 fuel. It is designed in order to eliminate manufacturing variability, primarily in the drilling of the flow holes, between the sub-suppliers providing the SDFBN to Westinghouse. This, in turn, will result in a loss coefficient for this product that is the same and independent of sub-supplier. Additionally, the side skirt communication flow holes that are present in the DFBN have been eliminated in the SDFBN as a means of improving the debris mitigation performance of the bottom nozzle.

Testing by Westinghouse has demonstrated that the SDFBN has no adverse affect on thermal hydraulic performance, either with respect to the pressure drop or with respect to DNB. However, until a full core of the SDFBN is implemented, there will be a small transition core DNB penalty because of the slightly lower loss coefficient of the SDFBN as compared to the current DFBN in the resident fuel assemblies.

2. Starting with Region 17 (Cycle 15) the Robust Protective Grid (RPG) replaces the protective bottom grid which has been used since Cycle 7 (Region 9). The RPG was developed by Westinghouse as a result of observed failures in the protective bottom grids, as noted in Post Irradiation Exams (PIE) performed at several different plants. It was determined that the observed failures were the result of two 28/18 4.2-15 Rev. 31

dimples.

The RPG implements design changes that include: 1.) increasing the maximum nominal height of the grid, 2.) increasing the ligament length and the radii of the ligament cutouts, and 3.) the use of four additional spacers to help support the grid.

Additionally, the nominal height of the RPG was increased, as compared to the protective bottom grid, to allow V-notch window cutouts to be added which will minimize flow-induced vibration caused by vortex shedding at the trailing edge of the inner grid straps.

The design changes incorporated into the RPG design help address the issues of fatigue failures and failures due to SCC. It was determined that the changes noted above do not adversely impact the thermal-hydraulic performance of the RPG as there is no change to the loss coefficient. In addition, the RPG retains the original function of the protective bottom grid as a debris mitigation feature.

ting with Region 18 (Cycle 16), Optimized ZIRLO replaces ZIRLO as the fuel rod cladding duct. Optimized ZIRLO is incorporated to further reduce the fuel clad corrosion rate while ntaining the composition and physical properties, such as mechanical strength, similar to dard ZIRLO. The RFA-2 guide thimbles, instrumentation tubes, structural mid-grids, and s continue to be fabricated with ZIRLO.

ting with Region 20 (Cycle 18), the Westinghouse Integral Nozzle (WIN) top nozzle replaces Reconstitutable Top Nozzle (RTN). The WIN design is a proactive change made to reduce the ntial for holddown spring screw failures in the top nozzle by eliminating the holddown spring

w. The springs are held in the nozzle by a machined pocket and a tack welded pin pushed ugh the pocket and springs. The WIN design also eliminates the use of left and right-hand ngs in favor of a same-hand spring. Aside from the changes listed above, there are no hanical, nuclear, or thermal hydraulic differences between the WIN and RTN designs. The nge to the WIN top nozzle has no effect on handling or movement of the assembly.

ting with Region 21 (Cycle 19), a Lead Test Assembly (LTA) program is initiated with the rtion of eight (8) 17 x 17 RFA-2 fuel assemblies with AXIOM fuel rod cladding. The LTAs of the same design as the resident fuel except for the use of AXIOM fuel cladding in place of imized ZIRLO cladding. The purpose of the LTA program is to demonstrate the fuel rod ormance of the AXIOM cladding.

2.1 Fuel Rods fuel rods consist of uranium dioxide ceramic pellets contained in slightly cold worked aloy-4, ZIRLO or Optimized ZIRLO tubing which is plugged and seal-welded at the ends to apsulate the fuel. A schematic of the fuel rod is shown on Figure 4.2-3. The fuel pellets are t circular cylinders consisting of slightly enriched uranium dioxide powder which has been pacted by cold pressing and then sintered to the required density. The ends of each pellet are 28/18 4.2-16 Rev. 31

ched fuel pellets are coated with a boride absorber. The axial blanket is a six inch proximate) stack of natural or slightly enriched fuel pellets (solid or annular) located at the top bottom of the fuel stack in each fuel rod.

d volume and clearances are provided within the rods to accommodate fission gases released m the fuel, differential thermal expansion between the clad and the fuel, and fuel density nges during irradiation. Shifting of the fuel within the clad during handling or shipping prior to loading is prevented by a stainless steel helical spring which bears on top of the fuel. At mbly, the pellets are stacked in the clad to the required fuel height. The spring is then inserted the top end of the fuel tube and the end plugs pressed into the ends of the tube and welded.

fuel rods are internally pressurized with helium during the welding process in order to imize compressive clad stresses and prevent clad flattening under coolant operating pressures.

fuel rods are prepressurized and designed so that: the internal gas pressure mechanical design t given in Section 4.2.1.3 is not exceeded, the cladding stress-strain limits (Section 4.2.1.1) not exceeded for Condition I and II events, and clad flattening will not occur during the fuel life. The amount of prepressurization varies depending on fuel type.

ited substitutions of Zircaloy-4, ZIRLO or stainless steel filler rods for fuel rods may be used.

l assemblies in this configuration are analyzed in accordance with Reference 4.2-24 and wn by test or cycle-specific reload analyses to comply with all fuel safety design bases.

discussed in Section 4.2.2, the RFA, used for the first time in Region 9 (Cycle 7) implements protective grid which includes an elongated bottom end plug. In the RFA design, the fuel rod end plug was elongated and fitted with an external gripper to assist in positioning the fuel rod ng fabrication and also to facilitate fuel rod removal during reconstitution. The pre-welded gn of the fuel rod top and bottom end plugs has been changed to include a groove around the umference of the plug for the feed region.

ting with Region 10, the fuel rod top end plug has been shortened, by the elimination of the rnal gripper, to provide additional fuel rod growth margin.

2.2 Fuel Assembly Structure fuel assembly structure consists of a bottom nozzle, top nozzle, guide thimbles and grids, as wn on Figure 4.2-2.

2.2.1 Bottom Nozzle bottom nozzle serves as a bottom structural element of the fuel assembly and directs the lant flow distribution to the assembly. The square nozzle is fabricated from type 304 stainless l and consists of a perforated plate, skirt and four angle-legs with bearing plates, as shown on ure 4.2-2. The legs and skirt form a plenum for the inlet coolant flow to the fuel assembly. The e also prevents accidental downward ejection of the fuel rods from the fuel assembly. The 28/18 4.2-17 Rev. 31

stainless steel thimble screw with locking cup.

re are three types of bottom nozzles; the standard design, the debris filter bottom nozzle BN) and the Standardized Debris Filter Bottom Nozzle (SDFBN). The DFBN was introduced h the Region 5 fuel. The relatively large flow holes in the standard design were replaced with a pattern of smaller flow holes in the DFBN. Tests to measure pressure drop and demonstrate ctural integrity have been performed to verify that the DFBN is totally compatible with the dard design. Additionally, the DFBN is lower in height than the standard design to ommodate high burnup fuel.

lant flows from the plenum in the bottom nozzle upward through the penetrations in the plate he channels between the fuel rods. The penetrations in the plate are positioned between the s of the fuel rods.

al loads (hold-down) imposed on the fuel assembly and the weight of the fuel assembly are smitted through the bottom nozzle to the lower core plate. Indexing and positioning of the fuel mbly is controlled by alignment holes in two diagonally opposite bearing plates which mate h locating pins in the lower core plate. Lateral loads on the fuel assembly are transmitted to the er core plate through the locating pins.

discussed in Section 4.2.2, the RFA was used for the first time in Region 9 (Cycle 7) and this assembly design included the protective bottom grid which is positioned on the top plate of DFBN. Starting with Region 17 (Cycle 15), the SDFBN and RPG replace the DFBN and the ective bottom grid.

2.2.2 Top Nozzle top nozzle assembly functions as the upper structural element of the fuel assembly in addition roviding a partial protective housing for the rod cluster control assembly or other components.

y are installed in the guide thimble tubes. The top nozzle assembly consists of an adapter e, enclosure, top plate, and pads. The top nozzle assembly comprises holddown springs, pins crews, and clamps located on the top plate as shown on Figure 4.2-2. The springs and spring ws are made of Inconel 718 and 600, respectively, whereas other components of the top zle are made of type 304/304L stainless steel.

re are three types of top nozzles-the standard design, the Reconstitutable Top Nozzle (RTN),

the Westinghouse Integral Nozzle (WIN). The RTN has a groove in each thimble ugh-hole in the nozzle plate to facilitate attachment and removal. Additionally, the RTN is rter than the standard design to accommodate high burnup fuel. The RTN was introduced with Region 5 fuel. The WIN uses a different design than the RTN for attaching the holddown ngs to the top nozzle. In the WIN design, the spring clamps are machined directly into the zle casting to create spring pockets integral to the nozzle. The tail end of the holddown spring k slides into a blind pocket machined into the top nozzle casting. Instead of using a holddown ng screw, the spring pack is held in place by a retaining pin pushed vertically through the 28/18 4.2-18 Rev. 31

square adapter plate is provided with round penetrations and semicircular ended slots to mit the flow of coolant upward through the top nozzle. Other round holes are provided to ept inserts which are locked into internal grooves in the adapter plate at their upper ends using ck tube and mechanically attached to the thimble tubes at the lower ends. The ligaments in the e cover the tops of the fuel rods and prevent their upward ejection from the fuel assembly. The losure is a box-like structure which sets the distance between the adapter plate and the top

e. The top plate has a large square hole in the center to permit access for the control rods and control rod spiders. Holddown springs are mounted on the top plate and are retained by mps and either spring screws or retaining pins located at two diagonally opposite corners. On other two corners integral pads are positioned which contain alignment holes for locating the er end of the fuel assembly.

discussed in Section 4.2.2, the RFA, used for the first time in Region 9 (Cycle 7) will also tain a new composite cast top nozzle as a manufacturing process change. The new top nozzle nctionally identical to the original design.

noted in Section 4.2.2, improvements to the top nozzle incorporated for Region 10 have also n incorporated into subsequent batches through Batch 19. The top nozzle instrument tube plug been eliminated, the top nozzle spring screws have been improved to increase their resistance rimary water stress corrosion cracking (PWSCC), and the leaf springs have been changed to ommodate the slightly longer fuel assembly length.

noted in Section 4.2.2, the WIN includes mechanical changes from the RTN designed to rove the structural integrity of the top nozzle in response to observed stress corrosion cracking he top nozzle holddown spring screws and failure of the spring screw clamp. The holddown ng modification increases fuel assembly integrity and eliminates the potential for loose parts.

2.2.3 Guide Thimbles and Instrument Tube guide thimbles are structural members which also provide channels for the control rods, tron absorber rods, burnable poison rods, neutron source, or thimble plug assemblies. Each ble is fabricated from Zircaloy or ZIRLO tubing having two different diameters. The tube meter at the top section provides the annular area necessary to permit rapid control rod rtion during a reactor trip. Holes are provided on the thimble tube above the dashpot to reduce rod drop time. The lower portion of the guide thimble is swaged to a smaller diameter to uce diametral clearances and produce a dashpot action near the end of control rod travel during mal trip operation. The dashpot is closed at the bottom by means of an end plug with a small port to avoid fluid stagnation in the dashpot volume during normal operation. The top end of guide thimble is fastened to an insert by three expansion swages. The insert fits into and is ed into the top nozzle adapter plate using a lock tube. The lower end of the guide thimble is d with an end plug which is then fastened into the bottom nozzle by a locked screw.

28/18 4.2-19 Rev. 31

hanical fastening technique as depicted on Figures 4.2-6 and 4.2-7 are used for the top and om grids in a fuel assembly. Midgrids and IFM grids are fastened as shown in Figures 4.2-4 4.2-5.

expanding tool is inserted into the inner diameter of the thimble tube at the elevation of the sleeves that have been previously attached to the grid assembly. The four-lobed tool forces thimble and sleeve outward to a predetermined diameter, thus joining the two components.

top grid-to-thimble attachment is shown on Figure 4.2-6. The stainless steel sleeves are ed into the Inconel grid assembly. The guide thimbles are fastened to the long sleeves. The Inconel grid sleeve, top nozzle insert and thimble tube are joined together using a three bulge t mechanical attachment as shown in Figure 4.2-6.

bottom grid assembly is joined to the assembly (Figure 4.2-7). The stainless steel insert is t-welded to the bottom grid and later captured between the guide thimble end plug and the om nozzle by means of a stainless steel thimble screw.

described methods of grid fastening are standard and have been used successfully since the oduction of Zircaloy guide thimbles in 1969.

central instrumentation tube of each fuel assembly is constrained by seating in a counterbore he bottom nozzle at its lower end and is expanded at the top and mid grids in the same manner he previously described expansion of the guide thimbles to the grids. The tube is a constant meter and guides the incore neutron detectors.

guide thimbles and instrument tube used on the V5H fuel assemblies are slightly reduced in meter to accept the thicker Zircaloy/ZIRLO grids and slightly increased in length to allow e space for fuel rod growth at high burnup. The reduced diameter thimbles on the V5H fuel mbly still provides sufficient clearance for the core compartments in use at Millstone 3.

discussed in Section 4.2.2, the RFA, used for the first time in Region 9 (Cycle 7) will also lement an increased wall thickness in the guide thimbles and instrumentation tubes to improve ness and mitigate Incomplete Rod Insertion (IRI).

2.2.4 Grid Assemblies fuel rods (Figure 4.2-2) are supported at intervals along their length by grid assemblies ch maintain the lateral spacing between the rods. Each fuel rod is supported within each grid he combination of support dimples and springs. The grid assembly consists of individual ted straps assembled and interlocked into an egg-crate arrangement with the straps manently joined at their points of intersection. The straps contain spring fingers, support ples, and mixing vanes.

28/18 4.2-20 Rev. 31

h enough to minimize possible fretting, without overstressing the cladding at the points of tact between the grids and fuel rods. The grid assemblies also allow axial thermal expansion of fuel rods without imposing restraint sufficient to develop buckling or distortion of the fuel s.

o types of grid assemblies are used in each 17 x 17 STD fuel assembly. One type, with mixing es projecting from the edges of the straps into the coolant stream, is used in the high heat flux on of the fuel assemblies to promote mixing of the coolant. The other type, located at the ends he assembly, does not contain mixing vanes on the internal straps. The outside straps on all s contain mixing vanes which, in addition to their mixing function, aid in guiding the grids fuel assemblies past projecting surfaces during handling, and during loading and unloading of core.

V5H fuel assemblies use three types of grids; Inconel nonmixing vane grids at the top and om, Zircaloy or ZIRLO mixing vane grids, and Zircaloy or ZIRLO IFM grids. See ure 4.2-2 for the grid arrangement. The IFMs are located in the three uppermost spans ween the Zircaloy or ZIRLO mixing vane structural grids and incorporate a similar mixing e array. Their prime function is mid-span flow mixing in the hottest fuel assembly spans.

IFM grids are not designed to be structural members. The outer strap configuration was gned similar to mid-span grids to preclude grid hang-up and damage during fuel handling.

itionally, the grid envelope is smaller which further minimizes the potential for damage and uces calculated forces seismic/LOCA events. A callable geometry is therefore assured at the grid elevation as well as at the structural grid elevation.

discussed in Section 4.2.2, the RFA, used for the first time in Region 9 (Cycle 7), implemented Modified Low Pressure Drop (LPD) mid-grids, the Modified Intermediate Flow Mixer (IFM) s, and the protective bottom grid which is a debris mitigating feature.

mechanical design of the RFA-2 fuel assembly design introduced in Region 12 is the same as previous cycle RFA designs except for the use of a modified mid-grid to improve resistance to rod fretting. The new mid-grid design has been demonstrated to exhibit improved resistance uel rod fretting without significantly affecting any other thermal-hydraulic or mechanical ormance. The overall width of the mid-grid springs and local width of the dimples are larger he RFA-2 design versus the RFA.

2.3 Incore Control Components ctivity control is provided by neutron absorbing rods and a soluble chemical neutron absorber ic acid). The boric acid concentration is varied to control long term reactivity changes uding:

1. Fuel depletion and fission product buildup 28/18 4.2-21 Rev. 31

3. Reactivity change produced by intermediate term fission products such as xenon and samarium

4. Burnable absorber depletion chemical and volume control system is discussed in Chapter 9.

rod cluster control assemblies (RCCAs) provide reactivity control for:

1. Shutdown

2. Reactivity changes due to coolant temperature changes in the power range

3. Reactivity changes associated with the power coefficient of reactivity

4. Reactivity changes due to void formation egative moderator temperature coefficient throughout the entire cycle is desirable to reduce sible deleterious effects of a positive coefficient during loss of coolant or loss-of-flow dents. The first fuel cycle contains more excess reactivity than subsequent cycles due to the ing of all fresh (unburned) fuel. Since soluble boron alone is insufficient to ensure a negative derator coefficient, burnable absorbers are also used.

RCCAs and their control drive mechanisms are the only moving parts in the reactor.

ure 4.2-8 illustrates the rod cluster control and control rod drive mechanism assembly, in ition to the arrangement of these components in the reactor, relative to the interfacing fuel mbly and guide tubes. In the following paragraphs, each reactivity control component is cribed in detail. The control rod drive mechanism assembly is described in Section 3.9N.4.

neutron source assemblies provide a means of monitoring the core during periods of low tron activity. The thimble plug assemblies limit bypass flow through those fuel assembly bles which do not contain control rods, burnable absorber rods, or neutron source rods.

2.3.1 Full Length Rod Cluster Control Assembly (RCCA)

Rod Cluster Control Assemblies (RCCAs) used at Millstone Unit 3 have been provided by tinghouse and, starting in Cycle 13, they were provided by AREVA. The AREVA RCCAs are ctionally equivalent to the previously provided Westinghouse RCCAs (Thomas) and a core figuration of RCCAs can be made up of all Westinghouse RCCAs, all AREVA RCCAs or any bination of both.

RCCAs are divided into two categories: control and shutdown. The control groups pensate for reactivity changes due to variations in the operating conditions of the reactor, i.e.,

er and temperature variations. Two nuclear design criteria have been employed for selection 28/18 4.2-22 Rev. 31

ration, the total power peaking factor should be low enough to ensure that the power capability et. The control and shutdown group provides adequate shutdown margin.

RCCA is comprised of a group of individual neutron absorber rods fastened at the top end to a mon spider assembly (Westinghouse, Figure 4.2-9a; AREVA, Figure 4.2-9b). The absorber erial used in the control rods is silver-indium-cadmium alloy (Ag-In-Cd) which is essentially ck to thermal neutrons and has sufficient additional resonance absorption to significantly ease their worth. The absorber materials are in the form of bars which are sealed in stainless l tubes (Westinghouse, Figure 4.2-10; AREVA, Figure 4.2-9b) which may or may not have a r resistant coating. Sufficient diametric and end clearance is provided to accommodate tive thermal expansions. The bottom plugs are made bullet-nosed to reduce the hydraulic drag ng reactor trip and to guide smoothly into the dashpot section of the fuel assembly guide bles.

overall length is such that when the assembly is withdrawn through its full travel the tips of absorber rods remain engaged in the guide thimbles so that alignment between rods and bles is always maintained. Since the rods are long and slender, they are relatively free to form to small misalignments with the guide thimble.

2.3.1.1 Westinghouse RCC spider assembly is in the form of a central hub with radial vanes containing cylindrical ers from which the absorber rods are suspended. Handling detents for connection to the drive assembly are machined into the upper end of the hub. A coil spring inside the spider body orbs the impact energy at the end of the trip insertion. The radial vanes are joined to the hub by welding and brazing, and the fingers are joined to the vanes by brazing. A center post which ds the spring and its retainer is threaded into the hub within the skirt and welded to prevent ening in service.

components of the spider assembly are made from types 304 and 308 stainless steel except for retainer, which is 17-4 PH material, and the springs, which are Inconel 718 alloy. The tinghouse absorber rods use a type 304 stainless steel cladding. Westinghouse RCCAs ived in 1991 and later utilize chrome plated cladding to improve wear resistance. The material d in the absober rod end plugs is type 308 stainless steel. The design stresses used for the type material are the same as those defined in the ASME Code,Section III, for type 304 stainless

l. At room temperature the yield and ultimate stresses per ASTM 580 are exactly the same for two alloys. In view of the similarity of the alloy composition, the temperature dependence of ngth for the two materials is also assumed to be the same. The allowable stresses used as a ction of temperature are listed in Table I-1.2 of Section III of the ASME Code. The fatigue ngth for the type 308 material is based on the S-N curve for austenitic stainless steels on ures I-9.2 of Section III.

absorber rods are fastened securely to the spider. The rods are first threaded into the spider ers and then pinned to maintain joint tightness, after which the pins are welded in place. The 28/18 4.2-23 Rev. 31

2.3.1.2 AREVA RCCA AREVA RCCA spider is a single piece casting made of CF3 stainless steel. The coil spring erial within the AREVA spider is Inconel 718 alloy and the retainer is 17-4 PH material.

AREVA absorber rods use a type 316L stainless steel cladding with an ion-nitrided surface tment to improve wear resistance. The absorber material is in the form of two solid bars, with shorted lower end bar having a reduced diameter to allow for radiation induced swelling.

AREVA absober rods are fastened securely to the spider. They are first pinned to the spider, h a pin tack welded to the spider to set its position, and then a nut is screwed onto the top of the and tack welded to the spider to prevent rotation of the nut.

2.3.2 Burnable Absorber Assembly and Integral Fuel Burnable Absorbers (IFBA) nable absorber assemblies were only used in Cycles 1 and 2; IFBA has been used since.

h burnable absorber assembly consists of burnable absorber rods attached to a hold-down mbly. A burnable absorber assembly is shown on Figure 4.2-11. When needed for nuclear siderations, burnable absorber assemblies are inserted into selected thimbles within fuel mblies.

absorber rods consist of borosilicate glass tubes contained within type 304 stainless steel ular cladding which is plugged and seal welded at the ends to encapsulate the glass. The glass so supported along the length of its inside diameter by a thin wall tubular inner liner. The top of the liner is open to permit the diffused helium to pass into the void volume and the liner rhangs the glass. The liner has an outward flange at the bottom end to maintain the position of liner with the glass. A typical burnable absorber rod is shown in longitudinal and transverse s sections on Figure 4.2-11.

absorber rods in each fuel assembly are grouped and attached together at the top end of the s to a hold down assembly by a flat perforated retaining plate which fits within the fuel mbly top nozzle and rests on the adapter plate.

retaining plate and the absorber rods are held down and restrained against vertical motion ugh a spring pack which bears against the plate and is compressed by the upper core plate n the reactor upper internals assembly is lowered into the reactor. This arrangement ensures the absorber rods cannot be ejected from the core by flow forces. Each rod is permanently ched to the base plate by a nut which is lock-welded into place.

cladding in the burnable absorber rods is slightly cold worked type 304 stainless steel. All r structural materials are types 304 or 308 stainless steel except for the springs which are onel 718. The borosilicate glass tube provides sufficient boron content to meet the criteria 28/18 4.2-24 Rev. 31

gral fuel burnable absorbers (IFBA) consists of a thin ZrB2 coating on some of the fuel ets. The height of the ZrBr coating, the total number used in the core, and the placement ern are determined for each cycle of operation. IFBAs offer advantages in that burnable orber assemblies handling is avoided during refueling and there are a greater number of ilable locations within a fuel assembly to position the absorber.

2.3.3 Neutron Source Assembly purpose of the neutron source assemblies is to provide a base neutron level to ensure that the ore neutron detectors are operational and responding to core multiplication neutrons. The tron source assemblies also permit detection of changes in the core multiplication factor ng core loading refueling, and approach to criticality. This can be done since the tiplication factor is related to an inverse function of the detector count rate. Changes in the tiplication factor can be detected during addition of fuel assemblies while loading the core, nges in control rod positions, and changes in boron concentration.

ee types of neutron source assemblies have been utilized at Millstone Unit 3 from the first core cle 1) to Cycle 11. These are: 1.) the Primary Source Assembly (PSA), 2.) the single apsulated Secondary Source Assembly (SSA), and 3.) the double-encapsulated SSA. Neutron rce assemblies are employed in pairs on opposite sides of the core.

PSAs contain one primary source rod and a number of burnable absorber rods. The single apsulated SSAs contain a symmetrical grouping of four secondary source rods. The double-apsulated SSAs contain a symmetrical grouping of six secondary source rods. The neutron rce assemblies are inserted into the rod cluster control guide thimbles in fuel assemblies in cted unrodded locations. Additionally, the neutron source assemblies contain a hold-down mbly identical to that of the burnable poison assembly. The PSA is shown on Figure 4.2-13.

single-encapsulated and double-encapsulated SSAs are shown on Figure 4.2-14a and ure 4.2-14b, respectively.

rods in the PSAs contain a radioactive material that spontaneously emits neutrons during al core loading, reactor startup, and initial operation of the first core. After the rods in the s decay beyond the desired neutron flux level, neutrons are then supplied by the SSAs. The s in the SSAs contain a stable material that must be activated during reactor operation. The vation results in the subsequent release of neutrons.

cladding of the rods for both the PSAs and SSAs is slightly cold worked type 304 stainless

l. The rods in the PSAs contain capsules of californium (Pu-Be, possible alternate) source erial and alumina spacer to position the source material within the cladding. The rods in the le-encapsulated SSAs contain Sb-Be pellets stacked to a height of approximately 97 inches le the rods in the double-encapsulated SSAs contain Sb-Be pellets stacked to a height of roximately 88 inches. The rods in each assembly are permanently fastened at the top end to a d-down assembly. All other structural materials are constructed of type 304 or 308 stainless l except for the springs that are Inconel 718.

28/18 4.2-25 Rev. 31

ctors, called source range detectors, are used primarily when the core is subcritical and during cial subcritical modes of operation. In total, four source assemblies were installed in the le 1 reactor core: two PSAs and two SSAs. The SSAs were of the single-encapsulated design.

PSAs were removed after Cycle 1 and from Cycle 2 through Cycle 5, only the two single-apsulated SSAs were used.

ycle 6, two new, unirradiated double-encapsulated SSAs were inserted. The double-apsulated SSA design provides additional margin against failure of the source rod cladding the subsequent leakage of source material. The two single-encapsulated SSAs that were inally inserted in Cycle 1 remained inserted in the Cycle 6 core, and therefore, Cycle 6 used a l of four SSAs.

ycle 7, two new, unirradiated double-encapsulated SSAs were inserted in the core, replacing single-encapsulated SSAs that were originally inserted in Cycle 1. Cycles 7 through 10 rated in this manner with four (2 pairs) of double-encapsulated SSAs.

Cycle 11, two (one pair) double-encapsulated SSAs were removed and therefore, the Cycle 11 operated with one pair of double-encapsulated SSAs. As noted above, Cycles 2 through 5 operated with one pair of SSAs.

ycle 12, the two remaining SSAs were removed. For Cycles 12 through 14, the Millstone t 3 core operated without any SSAs.

ting in Cycle 15, two double-encapsulated SSAs that were previously used and discharged at end of Cycle 10 were re-inserted in the core. Cycles 15-17 operated with two SSAs (one pair).

ycle 18, two additional double-encapsulated SSAs that were previously used and discharged e end of Cycle 11 were re-inserted into the core. Cycle Unit 18 includes a total of 4 SSAs airs). Starting in Cycle 19, two double-encapsulated SSAs previously used in Cycle 18 were nserted into the core and the remaining two SSAs were discharged to the spent fuel pool.

le 19 contains a total of two SSAs (one pair).

2.3.4 Thimble Plug Assembly mble plug assemblies limit bypass flow through the rod cluster control guide thimbles in fuel mblies which do not contain either control rods, source rods, or burnable absorber rods.

removal of all thimble plugs was allowed for Cycles 3 and 4. However, beginning with le 5 the installation of thimble plugs and the resulting increase in core flow rate is credited lytically to provide additional DNB margin.

thimble plug assemblies consist of a flat base plate with short rods suspended from the om surface and a spring pack assembly (Figure 4.2-15). The 24 short rods, called thimble gs, project into the upper ends of the guide thimbles to reduce the bypass flow. Each thimble 28/18 4.2-26 Rev. 31

lug the ends of all vacant fuel assembly guide thimbles. When in the core, the thimble plug mblies interface with both the upper core plate and with the fuel assembly trip nozzles by ing on the adapter plate. The spring pack is compressed by the upper core plate when the er internals assembly is lowered into place.

components in the thimble plug assembly, except for the springs, are constructed from type or 308 stainless steel. The springs are Inconel 718.

3 DESIGN EVALUATION fuel assemblies, fuel rods, and incore control components are designed to satisfy the ormance and safety criteria of Section 4.2, the mechanical design bases of Section 4.2.1, and er interfacing nuclear and thermal-hydraulic design bases specified in Sections 4.3 and 4.4.

cts of Conditions II, III, IV or anticipated transients without trip on fuel integrity are ented in Chapter 15 or supporting topical reports.

initial step in fuel rod design evaluation for a region of fuel is to determine the limiting rod(s).

iting rods are defined as those rods whose predicted performance provides the minimum gin to each of the design criteria. For a number of design criteria, the limiting rod is the lead nup rod of a fuel region. In other instances, it may be the maximum power or the minimum nup rod. For the most part, no single rod is limiting with respect to all design criteria.

er identifying the limiting rod(s), a worst-case performance analysis is performed which siders the effects of rod operating history, model uncertainties, and dimensional variations. To fy adherence to the design criteria, the evaluation considers the effects of postulated transient er changes during operation consistent with Conditions I and II. These transient power eases can affect both rod average and local power levels. Parameters considered include rod rnal pressure, fuel temperature, clad stress, clad strain, and clad corrosion (oxidation and rogen pickup). In fuel rod design analyses, these performance parameters provide the basis for parison between expected fuel rod behavior and the corresponding design criteria limits.

l rod and assembly models used for the performance evaluations are documented and ntained under an appropriate control system. Materials properties used in the design luations are given in Reference 4.2-15.

3.1 Cladding

1. Vibration and wear Fuel rod vibrations are flow induced. The effect of the vibration on the fuel assembly and individual fuel rods is minimal. The cyclic stress range associated with deflections of such small magnitude is insignificant and has no effect on the structural integrity of the fuel rod.

28/18 4.2-27 Rev. 31

maintained. No significant wear of the clad or grid supports is expected during the life of the fuel assembly, based on out-of-pile flow tests, performance of similarly designed fuel in operating reactors, and design analyses.

Clad fretting and fuel vibration has been experimentally investigated, as shown in Reference 4.2-9.

2. Fuel rod internal pressure and cladding stresses A burnup dependent fission gas release model is used in determining the internal gas pressures as a function of irradiation time. The plenum height within the fuel rod has been designed to ensure that the maximum internal pressure of the fuel rod will not exceed the value which would cause: (1) the fuel/clad diametral gap to increase during steady state operation, and (2) extensive DNB propagation to occur.

The clad stresses at a constant local fuel rod power are low. Compressive stresses are created by the pressure differential between the coolant pressure and the rod internal gas pressure. Because of the prepressurization with helium, the volume average effective stresses are always less than approximately 10,000 psi at the pressurization level used in this fuel rod design. Stresses due to the temperature gradient are not included in this average effective stress because thermal stresses are, in general, negative at the clad inside diameter and positive at the clad outside diameter and their contribution to the clad volume average stress is small.

Furthermore, the thermal stress decreases with time during steady state operation due to stress relaxation. The stress due to pressure differential is highest in the minimum power rod at the beginning of life due to low internal gas pressure and the thermal stress is highest in the maximum power rod due to steep temperature gradient.

The internal gas pressure at beginning of life for the initial core is approximately 1,400 psia for a typical lead burnup fuel rod. The total tangential stress at the clad inside diameter at beginning of life is approximately 14,400 psi compressive (approximately 13,000 psi due to P and approximately 1,400 due to T) for a low power rod, operating at 5 kW/ft and approximately 12,000 psi compressive (8,500 psi due to P and approximately 3,500 psi due to T) for a high power rod operating at 15 kW/ft. However, the volume average effective stress at beginning of life is between approximately 8,000 psi (high power rod) and approximately 10,000 psi (low power rod). These stresses are substantially below even the unirradiated clad strength (55,500 psi) at a typical clad mean operating temperature of 700°F.

Tensile stresses could be created once the clad has come in contact with the pellet.

These stresses would be induced by the fuel pellet swelling during irradiation.

28/18 4.2-28 Rev. 31

creep (thermal- and irradiation-induced). The 1 percent strain criterion is extremely conservative for fuel-swelling driven clad strain because the strain rate associated with solid fission products swelling is very slow. A detailed discussion on fuel rod performance is given in Section 4.2.3.3.

3. Materials and chemical evaluation Zicaloy-4, ZIRLO or Optimized ZIRLO tubing has a high corrosion resistance to coolant, fuel, and fission products. As shown in Reference 4.2-6, there is considerable pressurized water reactor operating experience on the capability of Zircaloy/ZIRLO as a clad material. Controls on fuel fabrication specify maximum moisture levels to preclude clad hydriding.

ZIRLO fuel rod cladding was used in the feed fuel assemblies from Cycle 5 (Region 7) to Cycle 15 (Region 17). Optimized ZIRLO fuel rod cladding was used starting with Cycle 16 (Region 18). Both ZIRLO and Optimized ZIRLO have improved resistance to corrosion above the Zircaloy-4 used previously. References 4.2-23 and 4.2-31 provide discussions related to the material properties of ZIRLO and Optimized ZIRLO.

Metallographic examination of irradiated commercial fuel rods have shown occurrences of fuel/clad chemical interaction. Reaction layers of < 1 mil in thickness have been observed between fuel and clad at limited points around the circumference. Metallographic data indicate that this interface layer remains very thin even at high burnup. Thus, there is no indication of propagation of the layer and eventual clad penetration.

Stress corrosion cracking is another postulated phenomenon related to fuel/clad chemical interaction. Out-of-pile tests have shown that in the presence of high clad tensile stresses, large concentrations of iodine can chemically attack the Zircaloy tubing and lead to eventual clad cracking. Extensive post-irradiation examination has produced no conclusive in-pile evidence that this mechanism is operative in commercial fuel.

Reference 4.2-36 describes the Westinghouse cladding corrosion model that is used to analyze the corrosion of ZIRLO and Optimized ZIRLO cladding as part of the fuel rod design analysis.

4. Rod bowing Reference 4.2-12, presents the model used for evaluation of fuel rod bowing.

Additional discussion on rod bowing is provided in Section 4.2.3.3 (Item 5) and Section 4.4.2.2.5.

28/18 4.2-29 Rev. 31

This subject is discussed in Chapter 15.

6. Creep collapse and creepdown This subject and the associated irradiation stability of cladding have been evaluated using the models described in References 4.2-25 and 4.2-31. It has been established that the design basis of no clad collapse during planned core life can be satisfied by limiting fuel densification and by having a sufficiently high initial rod internal pressure.

7. Irradiation Stability of the Cladding Testing of irradiated Zircaloy-4 is provided in References 4.2-15 and 4.2-23 for ZIRLO and Optimized ZIRLO. Pressurized water reactor operating experience on the capability of Zicaloy-4, ZIRLO or Optimized ZIRLO tubing as a cladding material is summarized in Reference 4.2-6.

8. Cycling and Fatigue A comprehensive review of the available strain fatigue models was conducted by Westinghouse as early as 1968. This review included the Langer-ODonnell model, the Yao-Munse model and the Manson-Halford model. Upon completion of this review and using the results of the Westinghouse experimental progrms discussed below, it was concluded that the approach defined by Langer-ODonnell would be retained and the empirical factors of their correlation modified in order to conservatively bound the results of the Westinghouse testing program.

The Westinghouse testing program was subdivided into the following subprograms:

1. A rotating bend fatigue experiment on unirradiated Zircaloy-4 specimens at room temperature and at 725°F. Both hydrided and nonhydrided Zircaloy-4 cladding were tested.

2. A biaxial fatigue experiment in gas autoclave on unirradiated Zircaloy-4 cladding, both hydrided and nonhydrided.

3. A fatigue test program on irradiated cladding from the CVS and Yankee Core V conducted at Battelle Memorial Institute.

The results of these test programs provided information on different cladding conditions including the effects of irradiation, of hydrogen levels and of temperature.

28/18 4.2-30 Rev. 31

It is recognized that a possible limitation to the satisfactory behavior of the fuel rods in a reactor which is subjected to daily load follow is the failure of the cladding by low cycle strain fatigue. During their normal residence time in reactor, the fuel rods may be subjected to approximately 1000 cycles with typical changes in power level from 50 to 100 percent of their steady state values.

The assessment of the fatigue life of the fuel rod cladding is subject to a considerable uncertainty due to the difficulty of evaluating the strain range which results from the cyclic interaction of the fuel pellets and cladding. This difficulty arises, for example, from such highly unpredictable phenomenon as pellet cracking, fragmentation and relocation. Nevertheless, since early 1968, this particular phenomenon has been investigated analytically and experimentally.

Strain fatigue tests on irradiated and nonirradiated hydrided Zr-4 claddings were performed, which permitted a definition of a conservative fatigue life limit and recommendation on a methodology to treat the strain fatigue evaluation of the Westinghouse reference fuel rod designs.

It is believed that the final proof of the adequacy of a given fuel rod design to meet the load follow requirements can only come from incore experiments performed on actual reactors. Experience in load follow operation dates back to early 1970 with the load follow operation of the Saxton reactor. Successful Load follow operation has been performed on Reactor A (> 400 load follow cycles) and Reactor B (> 500 load follow cycles). In both cases, there was no significant coolant activity increase that could be associated with the load follow mode of operation.

3.2 Fuel Materials Considerations ered, high density uranium dioxide fuel reacts only slightly with the clad, at core operating peratures and pressures. In the event of clad defects, the high resistance of uranium dioxide to ck by water protects against fuel deterioration although limited fuel erosion can occur. As has n shown by operating experience and extensive experimental work, the thermal design meters conservatively account for changes in the thermal performance of the fuel elements to pellet fracture which may occur during power operation. The consequences of defects in clad are greatly reduced by the ability of uranium dioxide to retain fission products including e which are gaseous or highly volatile. Observations from several operating Westinghouse surized water reactors, Reference 4.2-13 have shown that, under irradiation, fuel pellets can sify to higher than manufactured values. Fuel densification and subsequent settling of the fuel ets can result in local and distributed gaps in the fuel rods. Fuel densification has been imized by improvements in the fuel manufacturing process and by specifying a nominal 95 ent initial fuel density.

28/18 4.2-31 Rev. 31

eference 4.2-21.

effects of waterlogging on fuel behavior are discussed in Section 4.2.3.3.

3.3 Fuel Rod Performance he calculation of the steady state performance of a nuclear fuel rod, the following interacting ors must be considered:

1. Clad creep and elastic deflection

2. Pellet density changes, thermal expansion, gas release, and thermal properties as a function of temperature and fuel burnup

3. Internal pressure as a function of fission gas release, rod geometry, and temperature distribution se effects are evaluated by the fuel rod design model described in References 4.2-21 and 4.2-accounting for time dependent fuel densification and clad creep. With these interacting factors sidered, the model determines the fuel rod performance characteristics for a given rod metry, power history, and axial power shape. In particular, internal gas pressure, fuel and clad peratures, and clad deflections are calculated. The fuel rod is divided into several axial ions and radially into a number of annular zones. Fuel density changes are calculated arately for each segment. The effects are integrated to obtain the internal rod pressure. The al rod internal pressure is selected to delay fuel/clad mechanical interaction and to avoid the ntial for flattened rod formation. It is limited, however, by the design criteria for the rod rnal pressure (Section 4.2.1.3). The gap conductance between the pellet surface and the clad er diameter is calculated as a function of the composition, temperature, and pressure of the gas ture, and the gap size of contact pressure between clad and pellet. After computing the fuel perature for each pellet annular zone, the fractional fission gas release is assessed using an irical model derived from experimental data in Reference 4.2-21. The total amount of gas ased is based on the average fractional release within each axial and radial zone and the gas eration rate which in turn is a function of burnup. Finally, the gas released is summed over all es and the pressure is calculated. The code shows good agreement in fit for a variety of lished and proprietary data on fission gas release, fuel temperatures, and clad deflections in erence 4.2-21. These data include variations in power, time, fuel density, and geometry.

1. Fuel/cladding mechanical interaction One factor in fuel element duty is potential mechanical interaction of fuel and clad.

This fuel/clad interaction produces cyclic stresses and strains in the clad, and these, in turn, consume clad fatigue life. The reduction of fuel/clad interaction is therefore a goal of design. The technology for using prepressurized fuel rods in 28/18 4.2-32 Rev. 31

The gap between the fuel and clad is initially sufficient to prevent hard contact between the two. However, during power operation a gradual compressive creep of the clad onto the fuel pellet occurs due to the external pressure exerted on the rod by the coolant. Clad compressive creep eventually results in the fuel/clad contact.

Once fuel/clad contact occurs, changes in power level result in changes in clad stresses and strains. By using prepressurized fuel rods to partially offset the effect of the coolant external pressure, the rate of clad creep toward the surface of the fuel is reduced. Fuel rod prepressurization delays the time at which fuel/clad contact occurs and hence significantly reduces the extent of cyclic stresses and strains experienced by the clad both before and after fuel/clad contact. These factors result in an increase in the fatigue life margin of the clad and lead to greater clad reliability. If gaps should form in the fuel stacks, clad flattening will be prevented by the rod prepressurization so that the flattening time will be greater than the fuel core life.

A two dimensional (r, ) finite element model has been established to investigate the effects of radial pellet cracks on stress concentrations in the clad (Reference 4.2-18). Stress concentration, herein, is defined as the difference between the maximum clad stress in the direction and the mean clad stress. The first case has the fuel and clad in mechanical equilibrium and as a result the stress in the clad is close to zero. In subsequent cases the pellet power is increased in steps and the resultant fuel thermal expansion imposes tensile stress in the clad. In addition to uniform clad stresses, stress concentrations develop in the clad adjacent to radial cracks in the pellet. These radial cracks have a tendency to open during a power increase but the frictional forces between fuel and clad oppose the opening of these cracks and result in localized increases in clad stress. As power is further increased, large tensile stresses exceed the ultimate tensile strength of UO2, and additional cracks in the fuel are created which limit the magnitude of the stress concentration in the clad.

As part of the standard fuel rod design analysis, the maximum stress concentration evaluated from finite element calculations is added to the volume averaged effective stress in the clad as determined from one dimensional stress/strain calculations. The resultant clad stress is then compared to the temperature-dependent yield stress in order to ensure that the stress/strain criteria are satisfied.

Transient Evaluation Method Pellet thermal expansion due to power increases is considered the only mechanism by which significant stresses and strains can be imposed on the clad. Power increases in commercial reactors can result from fuel shuffling (e.g., region 3 positioned near the center of the core for cycle 2 operation after operating near the periphery during cycle 1), reactor power escalation following extended reduced 28/18 4.2-33 Rev. 31

core physics calculations. During burnup, the amount of diametral gap closure is evaluated based upon the pellet expansion cracking model, clad creep model, and fuel swelling model. At various times during the depletion, the power is increased locally on the rod to the burnup dependent attainable power density as determined by core physics calculations. The radial, tangential, and axial clad stresses resulting from the power increase are combined into a volume average effective clad stress.

The Von Mises criterion or the ASME methodology calculated clad stress (Reference 4.2-35) is used to determine if the clad yield stress has been exceeded.

This criterion states that an isotropic material in multiaxial stress begins to yield plastically when the effective stress exceeds the yield stress as determined by an axial tensile test. The yield stress correlation is that for irradiated cladding, since fuel/clad interaction occurs at high burnup. In applying this criterion, the effective stress is increased by an allowance which accounts for stress concentrations in the clad adjacent to radial cracks in the pellet, prior to the comparison with the yield stress. This allowance was evaluated using a two dimensional (r,) finite element model. The ASME clad stress methodology utilizes the unirratdiated clad yield strength in the analysis discussed in Section 4.2.1.1.

Slow transient power increases can result in large clad strains without exceeding the clad yield stress because of clad creep and stress relaxation. Therefore, in addition to the yield stress criterion, a criterion on allowable clad strain is necessary. Based upon high strain rate burst and tensile test data on irradiated tubing, 1 percent strain was determined to be a conservative lower limit on irradiated clad ductility and thus adopted as a design criterion (Reference 4.2-18).

A comprehensive review of the available strain-fatigue models was conducted by Westinghouse as early as 1968. This included the Langer-ODonnell model (Reference 4.2-1), the Yao-Munse model, and the Manson-Halford model. Upon completion of this review and using the results of the Westinghouse experimental programs discussed below, it was concluded that the approach defined in Reference 4.2-1 would be retained and the empirical factors of their correlation modified in order to conservatively bound the results of the Westinghouse testing program.

The Langer-ODonnell empirical correlation has the following form:

E 100 S a = ------------- ln ---------------------- + S e 4 Nf 100 - RA where:

28/18 4.2-34 Rev. 31

t = total strain range (in/in)

E = Youngs Modulus (lb/in2)

RA = effective reduction in area at fracture in a uniaxial tensile test (percent)

Se = effective endurance limit (lb/in2)

Both RA and Se are empirical constants which depend on the type of material, the temperature, and irradiation conditions.

The Westinghouse testing program was subdivided into the following subprograms:

a. A rotating bend fatigue experiment on unirradiated Zircaloy-4 specimens at room temperature and at 725°F. Both hydrided and nonhydrided Zircaloy-4 cladding were tested.

b. A biaxial fatigue experiment in a gas autoclave on unirradiated Zircaloy-4 cladding both hydrided and nonhydrided.

c. A fatigue test program on irradiated cladding from the Carolina-Virginia Tube Reactor and Yankee Core V conducted at Battelle Memorial Institute (Reference 4.2-18).

The results of these test programs provided information on different cladding conditions, including the effect of irradiation, hydrogen level, and temperature.

The design equations followed the concept for the fatigue design criterion according to the ASME Code,Section III, namely:

a. The calculated pseudo-stress amplitude (Sa) has to be multiplied by a factor of 2 in order to obtain the allowable number of cycles (Nf).

b. The allowable cycles for a given Sa is 5 percent of Nf, or a safety factor of 20 on cycles.

The lesser of the two allowable number of cycles is selected. The cumulative fatigue life fraction is then computed as:

28/18 4.2-35 Rev. 31

N fk

-1 1

where:

nk = number of cycles of mode k Nfk = number of allowable cycles It is recognized that a possible limitation to the satisfactory behavior of the fuel rods in a reactor which is subjected to daily load follow is the failure of the clad by low-cycle strain fatigue. During their normal residence time in reactor, the fuel rods may be subjected to approximately 1,000 cycles with typical changes in power level from 50 to 100 percent of their steady state values.

The assessment of the fatigue life of the fuel rod clad is subject to a considerable uncertainty due to the difficulty of evaluating the strain range which results from the cyclic interaction of the fuel pellets and clad. This difficulty arises, for example, from such highly unpredictable phenomena as pellet cracking, fragmentation, and relocation. Nevertheless, since early 1968, this particular phenomenon has been investigated analytically and experimentally (Reference 4.2-1). Strain fatigue tests on irradiated and nonirradiated hydrided Zircaloy-4 claddings were performed which permitted a definition of a conservative fatigue life limit and recommendation for a methodology to treat the strain fatigue evaluation of the Westinghouse reference fuel rod designs (Reference 4.2-18).

It is believed that the final proof of the adequacy of a given fuel rod design to meet the load follow requirements can come only from incore experiments performed on actual reactors. Experience in load follow operation dates back to early 1970 with the load follow operation of the Saxton reactor. Successful load follow operation has been performed on reactor A (approximately 400 load follow cycles) and reactor B (>500 load follow cycles). In both cases, there was no significant coolant activity increase that could be associated with the load follow mode of operation.

2. Irradiation experience Westinghouse fuel operational experience is presented in Reference 4.2-6.

Additional test assembly and test rod experience are given in Sections 8 and 23 of Reference 4.2-13.

3. Fuel and cladding temperature 28/18 4.2-36 Rev. 31

4. Waterlogging Local cladding deformations typical of waterlogging bursts have never been observed in commercial Westinghouse fuel. (Waterlogging damage of a previously defected fuel rod has occasionally been postulated as a mechanism for subsequent rupture of the cladding. Such damage has been postulated as a consequence of a power increase on a rod after water has entered such a rod through a clad defect of appropriate size. Rupture is postulated upon power increase if the rod internal pressure increase is excessive due to insufficient venting of water to the reactor coolant.) Experience has shown that the small number of rods which have acquired clad defects, regardless of primary mechanism, remain intact and do not progressively distort or restrict coolant flow. In fact, such small defects are normally observed through reductions in coolant activity to be progressively closed upon further operation due to the buildup of zirconium oxide and other substances. Secondary failures which have been observed in defected rods are attributed to hydrogen embrittlement of the cladding. Post-irradiation examinations point to the hydriding failure mechanism rather than a waterlogging mechanism; the secondary failures occur as axial cracks in the cladding and are similar regardless of the primary failure mechanism. Such cracks do not result in flow blockage or increase the effects of any postulated transients.

More information is provided in Reference 4.2-2.

5. Potentially damaging temperature effects during transients The fuel rod experiences many operational transients (intentional maneuvers) during its residence in the core. A number of thermal effects must be considered when analyzing the fuel rod performance.

The clad can be in contact with the fuel pellet at some time in the fuel lifetime.

Clad/pellet interaction occurs if the fuel pellet temperature is increased after the clad is in contact with the pellet. Clad/pellet interaction is discussed in Section 4.2.3.3.

The potential effects of operation with waterlogging fuel are discussed in Section 4.2.3.3 which concludes that waterlogging is not a concern during operational transients.

Clad flattening, as shown in Reference 4.2-11 has been observed in some operating power reactors. Thermal expansion (axial) of the fuel rod stack against a flattened section of clad could cause failure of the clad. This is no longer a concern because clad flattening is precluded during the fuel residence in the core (Section 4.2.3.1).

28/18 4.2-37 Rev. 31

fuel rods is precluded because the grid assemblies allow axial movement of the fuel rods relative to the grids. Specifically, thermal expansion of the fuel rods is considered in the grid design so that axial loads imposed on the fuel rods during a thermal transient will not result in excessively bowed fuel rods.

6. Fuel element burnout and potential energy release As discussed in Section 4.4.2.2, the core is protected from DNB over the full range of possible operating conditions. In the extremely unlikely event that DNB should occur, the clad temperature will rise due to the steam blanketing at the rod surface and the consequent degradation in heat transfer. During this time there is a potential for chemical reaction between the cladding and the coolant. However, because of the relatively good film boiling heat transfer following DNB, the energy release resulting from this reaction is insignificant compared to the power produced by the fuel.

7. Coolant flow blockage effects on fuel rods This evaluation is presented in Section 4.4.4.7.

3.4 Spacer Grids reactor core coolant flow channels were established and maintained by the fuel assembly cture composed of grids and guide thimbles. The lateral spacing between fuel rods is provided controlled by the support dimples of adjacent grid cells. Contact of the fuel rods on the ples is maintained through the clamping force of the grid springs. Lateral motion of the fuel s is opposed by the spring force and the internal moments generated between the spring and support dimples.

e history numerical integration techniques were used to analyze the fuel assembly responses lting from the lateral safe shutdown earthquake (SSE) and the most limiting main coolant break accident, LOCA. The reactor vessel motions resulting from the transient loading were mmetric with respect to the geometrical center of the reactor core. The complete fuel assembly finite element model was employed to determine the fuel assembly deflections and grid act forces.

omparison of the seismic (SSE) response spectrum of the reactor vessel supports versus the onse spectrum of the time history indicated that the time history spectrum generally eloped the plant design spectrum with the exception of a small frequency range at the second de of the fuel assembly. The seismic analyses performed for a number of plants indicated that maximum impact response was, in general, influenced by the acceleration level of the input ing function at the fuel assembly fundamental mode. Thus, the data in seismic time histories esponding to the design envelope were conservatively used for the fuel evaluation.

28/18 4.2-38 Rev. 31

lstone 3 is fifteen 17 x 17 8-grid fuel assemblies arranged in a planar array. Gapped elements ulated the clearances between the peripheral fuel assemblies and the baffle plates. IFM grids not structural components and are not included.

fuel assembly essential dynamic properties, such as the fuel assembly vibration frequencies, de shapes, and mass distribution were presented in the finite element model. The time history ions for the upper and lower core plates and the motions for the core barrel at the upper core e elevation were simultaneously introduced into the simulated core model. The analytical cedures, the fuel assembly and core modeling, and the methodology are detailed in References 8 and 4.2-7. The time history inputs representing the SSE motions and the coolant pipe ure transients were obtained from the time history analyses of the reactor vessel internals.

d crush tests and results of seismic and LOCA evaluations indicate the grids maintain a metry that is capable of being cooled under the worst-case accident, Condition IV event.

3.4.1 Grid Analysis maximum grid impact forces for both the seismic accident and asymmetric LOCA occur at peripheral fuel assembly locations adjacent to the baffle wall. The maximum grid impact es result from postulated LOCA and seismic loadings, and are required to be less than the wable grid crush strength. A calculation of the maximum LOCA and seismic grid impact es, combined using the square root sum of the squares method in accordance with SRP 4.2, endix A, demonstrated that the maximum value is below the allowable grid strength.

er studies of Zircaloy and ZIRLO spacer grids crush strengths are contained in References 4.2-nd 4.2-23.

grid strength was established experimentally. It was based on the 95 percent confidence level he true mean as taken from the distribution of measurements.

3.4.2 Nongrid Component Analyses stresses induced in the various fuel assembly nongrid components were calculated. The ulations were based on the maximum responses obtained from the most limiting LOCA and mic accident conditions. The fuel assembly axial forces resulting from the LOCA accident e the primary sources of stresses in the thimble guide tube and the fuel assembly nozzles. The uced stresses in the fuel rods result from the relative deflections during the simulated seismic LOCA accidents. The fuel rod stresses were generally small. The combined seismic and CA induced stresses of the various fuel assembly components presented in Table 4.2-1 were ressed as a percentage of the allowable limit. Consequently, the fuel assembly components are cturally acceptable under the postulated accident design conditions for Millstone 3.

28/18 4.2-39 Rev. 31

3.5.1 Stresses and Deflections fuel assembly component stress levels are limited by the design. For example, stresses in the rod due to thermal expansion and Zircaloy irradiation growth are limited by the relative ion of the rod as it slips over the grid spring and dimple surfaces. Clearances between the fuel ends and nozzles are provided so that Zircaloy irradiation growth does not result in rod end rferences. The growth of ZIRLO and Optimized ZIRLO is expected to be about half that of aloy-4. Stresses in the fuel assembly caused by tripping of the rod cluster control assembly e little influence on fatigue because of the small number of events during the life of an mbly. Assembly components and prototype fuel assemblies made from production parts have n subjected to structural tests to verify that the design bases requirements are met.

fuel assembly design loads for shipping have been established at 4g axial and 6g lateral.

elerometers are permanently placed into the shipping cask to monitor and detect fuel mbly accelerations that would exceed the criteria. Past history and experience have indicated loads which exceed the allowable limits rarely occur. Exceeding the limits requires spection of the fuel assembly for damage. Tests on various fuel assembly components, such as grid assembly, sleeves, inserts, and structure joints, have been performed to ensure that the ping design limits do not result in impairment of fuel assembly function. Seismic analysis of fuel assembly is presented in Reference 4.2-8.

3.5.2 Dimensional Stability rototype fuel assembly has been subjected to column loads in excess of those expected in mal service and faulted conditions (Reference 4.2-8).

interference with control rod insertion into thimble tubes will occur during a postulated LOCA sient due to fuel rod swelling, thermal expansion, or bowing. In the early phase of the sient following the coolant break, the high axial loads, which could be generated by the erence in thermal expansion between fuel clad and thimbles, are relieved by slippage of the rods through the grids. The relatively low drag force restraint on the fuel rods will induce y minor thermal bowing, which is insufficient to close the fuel rod-to-thimble tube gap.

erence 4.2-8 shows that the fuel assemblies will maintain a geometry amenable to cooling ng a combined seismic and double-ended LOCA.

3.6 Reactivity Control Assembly and Burnable Absorber Rods

1. Internal pressure and cladding stresses during normal, transient, and accident conditions The designs of the burnable absorber and source rods provide a sufficient cold void volume to accommodate the internal pressure increase during operation. This is 28/18 4.2-40 Rev. 31

For the burnable absorber rod used in Cycles 1 and 2, the use of glass in tubular form provides a central void volume along the length of the rods (Figure 4.2-11).

For the source rods, a void volume is provided within the rod in order to limit the internal pressure increase until end of life (Figures 4.2-13 and 4.2-14).

The stress analysis of these rods assumes 100 percent gas release to the rod void volume in addition to the initial pressure within the rod.

During normal transient and accident conditions the void volume limits the internal pressures to values which satisfy the criteria in Section 4.2.1.6. These limits are established not only to ensure that peak stresses do not reach unacceptable values, but also limit the amplitude of the oscillatory stress component in consideration of the fatigue characteristics of the materials.

Rod, guide thimble, and dashpot flow analyses indicate that the flow is sufficient to prevent coolant boiling within the guide thimble. Therefore, clad temperatures at which the clad material has adequate strength to resist coolant operating pressures and rod internal pressures are maintained.

2. Thermal stability of the absorber material, including phase changes and thermal expansion The radial and axial temperature profiles within the source and absorber rods have been determined by considering gap conductance, thermal expansion, neutron or gamma heating of the contained material as well as gamma heating of the clad.

The maximum temperatures of the Ag-In-Cd or hafnium control rod absorber material were calculated and found to be significantly less than the respective material melting point and occur axially at only the highest flux region. The thermal expansion properties of the absorber material and the phase changes are discussed in Reference 4.2-15 for the Ag-In-Cd and hafnium materials. Identical absorber material (Ag-In-Cd) is utilized by both Westinghouse and AREVA and the material properties are applicable to both vendors designs.

The maximum temperature of the borosilicate glass used in Cycles 1 and 2 was calculated to be about 1300 °F and takes place following the initial rise to power.

As the operating cycle proceeds, the glass temperature decreases for the following reasons:

a. Reduction in power generation due to boron-10 depletion

b. Better gap conductance as the helium produced diffuses to the gap 28/18 4.2-41 Rev. 31

Sufficient diametral and end clearances have been provided in the neutron absorber, burnable absorber, and source rods to accommodate the relative thermal expansions between the enclosed material and the surrounding clad and end plug.

3. Irradiation stability of the absorber material, taking into consideration gas release and swelling The irradiation stability of the absorber material is discussed in Reference 4.2-15 for Ag-In-Cd and hafnium. Irradiation produces no deleterious effects in the absorber material.

As mentioned in Item 1 above, gas release is not a concern for the control rod material because no gas is released by the absorber material. Sufficient diametral and end clearances are provided to accommodate swelling of the absorber material. Identical absorber material (Ag-In-Cd) is utilized by both Westinghouse and AREVA and the material properties are applicable to both vendors designs.

Based on experience with the borosilicate glass used in Cycles 1 and 2, and on nuclear and thermal calculations, gross swelling or cracking of the glass tubing is not expected during operation. Some minor creep of the glass at the hot spot could occur, but would continue only until B-10 depletion and helium gap closure by creep had lowered the glass temperature to values which cause negligible creep.

The wall thickness of the inner liner is sized to provide adequate support in the event of slumping and to collapse locally before rupture of the exterior cladding if unexpected large volume changes, due to swelling or cracking, should occur. The ends of the inner liner are open to allow helium, which diffuses out of the glass to occupy the central void.

4. Potential for chemical interaction, including possible waterlogging rupture The structural materials selected have good resistance to irradiation damage and are compatible with the reactor environment.

Corrosion of the materials exposed to the coolant is quite low, and proper control of chloride and oxygen in the coolant prevents the occurrence of stress corrosion.

The potential for the interference with rod cluster control movement due to possible corrosion phenomena is very low.

Waterlogging rupture is not a failure mechanism associated with Westinghouse designed control rods. However, a breach of the cladding for any postulated reason does not result in serious consequences. Both the silver-indium-cadmium and hafnium absorber material are relatively inert and would remain remote from high coolant velocity regions. Rapid loss of material resulting in significant loss of reactivity control material would not occur. Bettis test results (Reference 4.2-15) 28/18 4.2-42 Rev. 31

There is extensive U.S. Naval reactor experience with unclad hafnium as an absorber material and its corrosion resistance has been excellent; in fact, it has been reported to be superior to Zircaloy-2 with respect to corrosion resistance (Reference 4.2-15). Ag-In-Cd RCCAs were introduced in Cycle 3.

consequences of a clad breach in the burnable absorber cladding would be small. It is cipated that upon clad breach, the borosilicate glass would be leached by the coolant water that localized power peaking of a few percent would occur; no design criteria would be ected to be violated.

4 TESTING AND INSPECTION PLAN 4.1 Quality Assurance Program: Westinghouse quality assurance program plan of the Energy Systems Business Unit is summarized in erences 4.2-5 and 4.2-10 and the Quality Management System.

program provides for control over all activities affecting product quality, commencing with gn and development and continuing through procurement, materials handling, fabrication, ing and inspection, storage, and transportation. The program also provides for the octrination and training of personnel and for the auditing of activities affecting product quality ugh a formal auditing program.

tinghouse drawings and product, process, and material specifications identify the inspections e performed.

4.2 Quality Control: Westinghouse lity control philosophy is generally based on the following inspections being performed to a ercent confidence that at least 95 percent of the product meets specification.

1. Fuel System Components and Parts The characteristics inspected depend upon the component parts, and the quality control program includes dimensional and visual examinations, check audits of test reports, material certification, and nondestructive examination, such as x-ray, ultrasonic (UT), leak detection, and gamma scan.

All material used in the Millstone Unit 3 core is accepted and released by Quality Control.

2. Pellets 28/18 4.2-43 Rev. 31

and surface conditions according to approved standards.

Density is determined as a percent of theoretical density using a geometric technique. Pellet hydrogen and chemical analyses are performed for each blend lot throughout pellet production.

3. Rod Inspection Fuel rod, control rodlet, burnable poison and source rod inspection consists of the following nondestructive examination techniques and methods, as applicable:

a. Leak testing - Each rod is tested using a calibrated mass spectrometer, with helium being the detectable gas.

b. Enclosure welds - All nonfuel weld enclosures are x-rayed. All fuel rod welds are UT- or x-ray-inspected. X-rays are taken in accordance with Westinghouse specifications meeting the requirements of ASTM-E-142.

c. Dimensional - All rods are dimensionally inspected prior to final release.

The requirements include such items as length, camber, girth weld diameter, and visual appearance utilizing approved standards.

d. Plenum dimensions - All fuel and nonfuel rods are inspected by gamma scan, fluoroscope, or other approved methods.

e. Pellet-to-pellet gaps - All fuel rods are inspected by fluoroscope, gamma scanning, or other methods.

f. All of the fuel rods are active gamma scanned to verify enrichment control prior to acceptance for assembly loading. In addition, coated fuel is passive scanned to verify enrichment control in the coated portion (IFBA) of the fuel stack.

g. Traceability - Traceability of rods and associated rod components is established by Quality Control.

4. Assemblies Each fuel rod, control rod, burnable poison and source rod assembly is inspected for compliance with drawing and/or specification requirements. Other incore control component inspection and specification requirements are given in Section 4.2.4.3.

5. Other Inspections 28/18 4.2-44 Rev. 31

a. Tool and gauge inspection and control, including calibration to primary and/or secondary working standards are performed at prescribed intervals on all serialized inspection and functional gages. Complete records are kept of calibration and conditions of tools and resultant product dispositions.

b. Audits are performed of inspection activities and records to ensure that prescribed methods are followed and that records are correct and properly maintained.

c. Surveillance inspection, where appropriate, and audits of outside contractors are performed to ensure conformance with specified requirements.

6. Process Control To prevent the possibility of mixing enrichments during fuel manufacture and assembly, strict enrichment segregation and other process controls are exercised.

The UO2 powder is kept in closed containers. The contents are fully identified both by descriptive tagging and through a computer monitoring system. An identification tag that provides traceability is affixed to the containers before transfer to powder storage. Isotopic content is confirmed by analysis.

Powder withdrawal from storage can be made by only one authorized group, which directs the powder to the correct pellet production line. All pellet production lines are physically separated from each other and pellets of only a single nominal enrichment are produced in a given production line or a segregated part of the line at any given time.

Finished pellets are placed on trays identified with the contract and enrichment and transferred to segregated storage carts within the confines of the pelleting area.

Samples from each pellet lot are tested for isotopic content and impurity levels prior to acceptance by Quality Control. Physical barriers prevent mixing of pellets of different nominal enrichments in this storage area. Unused powder and substandard pellets are returned to storage in the original containers, except for material from axial blanket rods.

Loading of pellets into the clad is performed on dedicated production lines. One rod design is loaded on a line at a time.

Each fuel rod is uniquely serialized with a traceability code which also identifies the contract and enrichment. The end plugs are inserted and then welded to seal the 28/18 4.2-45 Rev. 31

At the time of installation into an assembly, a matrix is generated to identify each rod in its position within a given assembly. The top nozzle is inscribed with a permanent unique identification number providing traceability to the fuel contained within the assembly.

Similar traceability is provided for burnable poison, source rods, and control rodlets, as required.

4.3 Incore Control Component Testing and Inspection ts and inspections are performed on each reactivity control component to verify the hanical characteristics. In the case of the full length rod cluster control assembly, prototype ing has been conducted and both manufacturing test/inspections and functional testing at the t site are performed.

ing the component manufacturing phase, the following requirements apply to the reactivity trol components to ensure proper functioning during reactor operation:

1. All materials are procured to specifications to attain the desired standard of quality.

2. Westinghouse, because of the manner of their manufacture, requires that a spider from each braze lot is proof tested by applying a 5,000 pound load to the spider body. This proof load provides a ending moment at the spider body approximately equivalent to 1.4 times the load caused by the acceleration imposed by the control rod drive mechanism.

3. Both manufacturers, AREVA and Westinghouse, require:

• All rods are checked for integrity by the methods described in Section (3)

Rod Inspection).

• To ensure proper fit up with the fuel assembly, the rod cluster control, burnable poison, and source assemblies are installed in the fuel assembly and checked for binding in the dry condition.

RCCAs were functionally tested, following initial core loading but prior to criticality, to onstrate reliable operation of the assemblies. The initial functional test is typically more rous then the subsequent confirmatory testing required by the Technical Specifications. The results confirmed that the functional requirements of the RCCAs were met.

demonstrate continuous free movement of the RCCAs and to ensure acceptable core power ributions during operations, partial movement checks are performed on every RCCA, as uired by the technical specifications. In addition, periodic drop tests of the full length RCCAs 28/18 4.2-46 Rev. 31

n RCCA cannot be moved by its mechanism, adjustments in the boron concentration ensure adequate shutdown margin would be achieved following a trip. Thus, inability to move one cluster control assembly can be tolerated. More than one inoperable rod cluster control mbly could be tolerated, but would impose additional demands on the plant operator.

refore, the number of inoperable RCCAs has been limited to one.

4.4 Tests and Inspections by Others: Westinghouse ny tests and inspections are to be performed on behalf of Westinghouse, Westinghouse will ew and approve the quality control procedures, inspection plans, etc., to be used to ensure that are equivalent to the description provided in Sections 4.2.4.1 through 4.2.4.3 and are ormed properly to meet all Westinghouse requirements.

4.5 In-Service Surveillance tinghouse has extensive experience with the use of 17 x 17 fuel assemblies in other operating ts. This experience is summarized in Reference 4.2-6, which is periodically updated to vide the most recent information on operating plant. There are no plans to provide a specific ervice surveillance program for this plant.

veillance of fuel and reactor performance will be routinely conducted at Millstone 3. Methods be employed during operation to detect the occurrence of fuel rod failures. Specifically, tor coolant chemistry samples and radiochemical analysis will be routinely performed to tify the existence of any fuel rod failures.

ctor coolant chemistry samples are routinely trended for indications of fuel performance. Fuel ections may be conducted depending on the results of this operational monitoring or any cial projects ongoing which could impact the fuel. These inspections may be performed by one ore means available at the time through commercial contractors as judged necessary by plant agement. To the extent practicable, leaking fuel assemblies/rods will be excluded from the rating cores.

4.6 On-Site Inspection ailed written procedures are used by the station staff for the post shipment inspection of all fuel and associated components, such as control rods, plugs, and inserts. Fuel handling cedures specify the sequence in which handling and inspection takes place.

ded fuel containers, when received on-site, are externally inspected to ensure that labels and kings are intact and that seals are unbroken. After the containers are opened, the shock cators attached to the suspended internals are inspected to determine if movement during sit exceeded design limitations.

28/18 4.2-47 Rev. 31

yethylene wrapper is then removed and a visual inspection of the entire bundle is performed.

tinghouse control rod assemblies are normally shipped in fuel assemblies and are inspected detailed, written procedures prior to core load. The control rod assembly is withdrawn from fuel assembly to ensure free and unrestricted movement. The exposed section is then visibly ected for mechanical integrity, replaced in the fuel assembly and stored with the fuel mbly. AREVA RCCAs are shipped separately from the Westinghouse provided fuel mblies. Following acceptable receipt inspection, the AREVA RCCAs are normally placed in assemblies.

4.7 Testing and Inspection Plan: AREVA RCCAs 4.7.1 Quality Assurance Program EVA engineering specifications require that core components be fabricated under an approved lity control program. This includes shop quality control procedures, which are audited by EVA quality assurance personnel. In addition, special process procedures are approved by EVA design personnel as required by the procurement documents.

EVA manufactures core components under a controlled manufacturing system, which includes plimentary written procedures and inspection provisions. Extensive attention is given to cessing details to ensure a reliable, reproducible, quality product.

4.7.2 Quality Control fabrication activities are supported and monitored by quality control. Additional inspections performed routinely along with the required inspection program to further assure the quality he final product.

4.7.3 Onsite Inspection EVA provides documentation for the inspection of reload assemblies manufactured and vered by AREVA. The post-shipment inspections of new fuel assemblies and insert ponents performed by the station described in Section 4.2.4.6 are also applicable to AREVA ponents.

5 REFERENCES FOR SECTION 4.2 1 ODonnell, W.J. and Langer, B.F. 1964. Fatigue Design Basis for Zircaloy Components.

Nuclear Science and Engineering, 20, 1-12.

2 Stephan, L. A. 1970. The Effects of Cladding Material and Heat Treatment on the Response of Waterlogged UO2 Fuel Rods to Power Bursts. IN-ITR-111.

28/18 4.2-48 Rev. 31

4 Westinghouse Energy System Business Unit Quality Management System.

5 WCAP-7800, Revision 6-A, 1983, Nuclear Fuel Division Quality Assurance Program Plan.

6 WCAP-8183 (Latest Revision), Operational Experience with Westinghouse Cores.

7 WCAP-8218 P-A (Proprietary) and WCAP-8219-A (Non proprietary) 1975, Hellman, J.

M. (Ed.), Fuel Densification Experimental Results and Model for Reactor Application.

8 WCAP-8236 (Proprietary) and WCAP-8288 (Non proprietary) 1973, Gesinski, L. and Chiang, D., Safety Analysis of the 17 x 17 Fuel Assembly for Combined Seismic and Loss-of-Coolant Accident.

9 WCAP-8278 (Proprietary) and WCAP-8279 (Non proprietary) 1974, Demario, E. E.,

Hydraulic Flow Test of the 17 x 17 Fuel Assembly.

10 WCAP-8370, Revision 10-A, 1983, Westinghouse Energy System Business Unit Quality Assurance Program Plan.

11 WCAP-8377 (Proprietary) and WCAP-8381 (Non proprietary) 1974, George, R. A.; Lee, Y. C.; and Eng, G. H., Revised Clad Flattening Model.

12 WCAP-8691, Revision 1 (Proprietary) and WCAP-8692, Revision 1 (Non- proprietary) 1979, Skaritka, Jr., (Ed.), Fuel Rod Bow Evaluation.

13 WCAP-8768, Revision 2, 1978, Eggleston, F. R. Safety-Related Research and Development for Westinghouse Pressurized Water Reactors, Program Summaries, Winter 1977 - Summer 1978.

14 WCAP-8963 (Proprietary) 1976 and WCAP-8964 (Non proprietary) 1977, Risher, D.

et al., Safety Analysis for the Revised Fuel Rod Internal Pressure Design Basis.

15 WCAP-9179, Revision 1 (Proprietary) and WCAP-9224 (Non proprietary) 1978, Beaumont, M.D., et al., Properties of Fuel and Core Component Materials and Appendix A, 1980 Hofnium.

16 Western New York Nuclear Research Center Correspondence With the U.S. Atomic Energy Commission on February 11 and August 27, 1971, Docket No. 50-57.

17 WCAP-9401-P-A (Proprietary) and WCAP-9402-A (Non-proprietary) 1981, Davidson, S.

L., et al., Verification Testing and Analysis of the 17 x 17 Optimized Fuel Assembly.

18 WCAP-9500-A, 1982, Davidson, S. L., Reference Core Report - 17 x 17 Optimized Fuel Assembly.

28/18 4.2-49 Rev. 31

20 WCAP-10444-P-A, 1985, Davidson, S. L., VANTAGE 5 Fuel Assembly Reference Core Report and Addendum 2-A, 1988, VANTAGE 5H Fuel Assembly.

21 WCAP-10851-P-A, 1988, Weiner, R. A. Improved Fuel Performance Models for Westinghouse Fuel Rod Design and Safety Evaluations.

22 WCAP-12488-A, 1994, Davidson, S. L., Westinghouse Fuel Criteria Evaluation Process.

23 WCAP-12610-P-A, 1995, Davidson, S. L. and Ryan, T. L., VANTAGE + Fuel Assembly Reference Core Report.

24 WCAP-13060-P-A, 1993, Slagle, W. H., Westinghouse Fuel Assembly Reconstitution Evaluation Methodology.

25 WCAP-13589-A, 1995, Kersting, P. J. et al., Assessment of Clad Flattening and Densification Power Spike Factor Elimination in Westinghouse Nuclear Fuel.

26 Brown, U. L., Generic Safety Evaluation for Performance Plus Fuel Features, SECL 305, April 5, 1994.

27 Kitchen, T. J., Generic Safety Evaluation for 17x17 Standard Robust Fuel Assembly (17x17 STD RFA), SECL-98-056, Revision 0, September 30, 1998.

28 Liparulo, N. J. (Westinghouse) letter to Lyons, J. E. (NRC), Transmittal of Response to NRC Request for Information on Wolf Creek Fuel Design Modifications, NSD-NRC 5189, June 30, 1997.

29 Liparulo, N. J. (Westinghouse) letter to Jones, R. C. (NRC), Transmittal of Presentation Material from NRC/Westinghouse Fuel Design Change Meeting on April 15, 1996, NSD-NRC-96-4964, April 22, 1996.

30 WCAP-12488-A, Addendum 1-A, Revision 1, 2002. Addendum to WCAP-12488-A, Revision to Design Criteria.

31 WCAP-12610-P-A and CENPD-404-P-A, Addendum 1-A, Rev. 0, July 2006, P. Schueren

& H.H. Shah, Optimized ZIRLOTM.

32 Sepp, H.A. (Westinghouse) letter to Wermiel, J. (NRC), Fuel Criterion Evaluation Process (FCEP) Notification of the RFA-2 Design, Revision 1, LTR-NRC-02-55, November 13, 2002.

33 Thomas, G. A. (AREVA) Letter to Sterner, R. W. (Dominion), Millstone Unit 3 RCCA Safety Analysis, FAB08-353, July 28, 2008.

28/18 4.2-50 Rev. 31

35 WCAP-10125-P-A, Addendum 1-A, Revision 1-A, Davidson, S.L. (Ed.), et al., Extended Burnup Evaluation of Westinghouse Fuel, May 2005.

36 WCAP-12610-P-A & CENPD-404-P-A, Addendum 2-A, Lenahan R., et al.,

Westinghouse Clad Corrosion Model for ZIRLO and Optimized ZIRLO, October 2013.

28/18 4.2-51 Rev. 31

(Percent of Allowable)

Uniform Stresses Combined Stresses Component (Direct/Membrane) (Membrane + Bending) imble 94.1 85.3 el Rod

• 38.5 32.1 p Nozzle Plate ** **

ttom Nozzle Plate ** **

ttom Nozzle Leg ** **

TES:

Including primary operating stresses.

Mechanical Testing performed to assure component structural integrity requirements are met.

28/18 4.2-52 Rev. 31

28/18 4.2-53 Rev. 31 17 STANDARD FUEL ASSEMBLY 28/18 4.2-54 Rev. 31

28/18 4.2-55 Rev. 31 28/18 4.2-56 Rev. 31 28/18 4.2-57 Rev. 31 28/18 4.2-58 Rev. 31 28/18 4.2-59 Rev. 31 06/28/18 4.2-60 Rev. 31 28/18 4.2-61 Rev. 31 06/28/18 4.2-62 Rev. 31 06/28/18 4.2-63 Rev. 31 06/28/18 4.2-64 Rev. 31 06/28/18 4.2-65 Rev. 31 28/18 4.2-66 Rev. 31 06/28/18 4.2-67 Rev. 31 28/18 4.2-68 Rev. 31 06/28/18 4.2-69 Rev. 31 06/28/18 4.2-70 Rev. 31 28/18 4.2-71 Rev. 31 1 DESIGN BASES s section describes the design bases and functional requirements used in the nuclear design of fuel and reactivity control system and relates these design bases to the General Design Criteria C) presented in 10 CFR 50, Appendix A. Where applicable, supplemental criteria, such as the nal Acceptance Criteria for Emergency Core Cooling Systems, are addressed. But, before ussing the nuclear design bases, it is appropriate to briefly review the four major categories ibed to conditions of plant operation.

full spectrum of plant conditions is divided into four categories, in accordance with the cipated frequency of occurrence and risk to the public:

1. Condition I - Normal Operation

2. Condition II - Incidents of Moderate Frequency

3. Condition III - Infrequent Faults

4. Condition IV - Limiting Faults eneral, the Condition I occurrences are accommodated with margin between any plant ameter and the value of that parameter which would require either automatic or manual ective action. Condition II incidents are accommodated with, at most, a shutdown of the tor with the plant capable of returning to operation after corrective action. Fuel damage (fuel age, as used here, is defined as penetration of the fission product barrier, i.e., the fuel rod

) is not expected during Condition I and Condition II events. It is not possible, however, to lude a very small number of rod failures. These are within the capability of the CVCS and are sistent with the plant design basis.

dition III incidents do not cause more than a small fraction of the fuel elements in the reactor e damaged, although sufficient fuel element damage might occur to preclude immediate mption of operation. The release of radioactive material due to Condition III incidents is not icient to interrupt or restrict public use of those areas beyond the exclusion boundary area.

thermore, a Condition III incident does not, by itself, generate a Condition IV fault or result in nsequential loss of function of the reactor coolant or reactor containment barriers.

dition IV occurrences are faults that are not expected to occur but are defined as limiting ts which must be designed against. Condition IV faults do not cause a release of radioactive erial that exceed the limits of 10 CFR 100.

core design power distribution limits related to fuel integrity are met for Condition I urrences through conservative design and maintained by the action of the control system. The uirements for Condition II occurrences are met by providing an adequate protection system ch monitors reactor parameters. The control and protection systems are described in 28/18 4.3-1 Rev. 31

1.1 Fuel Burnup is mitation on initial installed excess reactivity or average discharge burnup is not required other as is quantified in terms of other design bases, such as core negative reactivity feedback and tdown margin, as discussed below.

cussion l burnup is a measure of fuel depletion which represents the integrated energy output of the (MWD/MTU) and is a convenient means for quantifying fuel exposure criteria.

core design lifetime or design discharge burnup is achieved by installing sufficient initial ess reactivity in each fuel region and by following a fuel replacement program (such as that cribed in Section 4.3.2) that meets all safety related criteria in each cycle of operation.

ial excess reactivity installed in the fuel, although not a design bases, must be sufficient to ntain core criticality of full power operating conditions throughout cycle life with equilibrium on, samarium, and other fission products present. The end of design cycle life is defined to ur when the chemical shim concentration is essentially zero with control rods present to the ree necessary for operational requirements (e.g., the controlling bank at the bite position). In s of chemical shim boron concentration, this represents approximately 10 ppm with no trol rod insertion.

1.2 Negative Reactivity Feedback (Reactivity Coefficient) is fuel temperature coefficient will be negative, and the moderator temperature coefficient of tivity will be non-positive at 100 percent power, less than or equal to a linear ramp from m/°F at 100 percent power to +5.0 pcm/°F at 70 percent power, and less than or equal to 0 pcm/°F below 70 percent power, thereby providing negative reactivity feedback racteristics at full power. The design basis meets GDC-11.

cussion en compensation for a rapid increase in reactivity is considered, there are two major effects.

se are the resonance absorption effects (Doppler) associated with changing fuel temperature the neutron spectrum and reactor composition change effects resulting from changing derator density. These basic physics characteristics are often identified by reactivity fficients. The use of slightly enriched uranium ensures that the Doppler coefficient of tivity is negative. This coefficient provides the most rapid reactivity compensation. The core lso designed to have an overall moderator temperature coefficient of reactivity which is non-28/18 4.3-2 Rev. 31

er to +5.0 pcm/°F at 70 percent power, and less than or equal to +5.0 pcm/°F below ercent power. At full power coolant temperature or void content provides another, slower pensatory effect. The moderator temperature coefficient above can be achieved through use ixed burnable absorbers and/or control rods which decrease concentration of soluble boron le maintaining reactivity control.

trictions on burnable absorbers content (quantity and distribution) are not applied as a design s other than as they relate to accomplishment of a non-positive moderator temperature fficient which is within the limits stated above as discussed in Section 4.3.2.

1.3 Control of Power Distribution is nuclear design basis is that, with at least 95 percent confidence level:

1. The fuel will not be operated at greater than 15.45 kW/ft under normal operating conditions, including an allowance of 2 percent for calorimetric error.

2. Under abnormal conditions, including the maximum overpower condition, the fuel peak power will not cause melting, as defined in Section 4.4.1.2.

3. The fuel will not operate with a power distribution that violates the departure from nuclear boiling (DNB) design basis (as discussed in Section 4.4.1) under Condition I and II events, including the maximum overpower condition.

4. Fuel management will be such as to produce values of fuel rod power and burnup consistent with the assumptions in the fuel rod mechanical integrity analysis of Section 4.2.

above basis meets GDC-10.

cussion culations of extreme power shapes which affect fuel design limits are performed with proven hods and frequently verified with measurements from operating reactors. The conditions, er which limiting power shapes are assumed to occur, are conservatively chosen with regard to permissible operating state.

n though there is good agreement between calculated peak power and measurements, a lear uncertainty (Section 4.3.2.2.1) is applied to the calculated peak local power. Such a gin is provided both for the analyses for normal operating states and for anticipated transients.

28/18 4.3-3 Rev. 31

is maximum reactivity insertion rate due to withdrawal of rod cluster control assemblies or by on dilution is limited by plant design, hardware, and basic physics. During normal operation, maximum controlled reactivity insertion rate is limited. The maximum reactivity change rate accidental withdrawal of two control banks is set such that the peak linear heat rate and arture from nucleate boiling ratio limitations are not challenged. This satisfies GDC-25.

maximum reactivity worth of control rods and the maximum rates of reactivity insertion loying control rods are limited to preclude rupture of the coolant pressure boundary or uption of the core internals to a degree which would impair core cooling capacity due to a rod hdrawal or ejection accident (see Chapter 15).

owing any Condition IV event (rod ejection, steamline break, etc.) the reactor can be brought he shutdown condition and the core will maintain acceptable heat transfer geometry. This sfies GDC-28.

cussion ctivity addition associated with an accidental withdrawal of a control bank (or banks) is ted by the maximum rod speed (or travel rates) and by the worth of the bank(s). For this tor, the maximum control rod speed is documented in Section 7.7.1.2.1.

reactivity change rates are conservatively calculated, assuming unfavorable axial power and on distributions. The typical peak xenon burnout rate is significantly lower than the maximum tivity addition rate for normal operation and for accidental withdrawal of two banks.

1.5 Shutdown Margins is imum shutdown margin, as specified in the Technical Specifications, is required in all rating modes, in the hot standby shutdown condition, and in the cold shutdown condition.

ll analyses involving reactor trip, the single, highest worth rod cluster control assembly is tulated to remain untripped in its full-out position (stuck rod criterion). This satisfies GDC-26.

cussion o independent reactivity control systems are provided: control rods and soluble boron in the lant. The control rod system can compensate for the reactivity effects of the fuel and water perature changes accompanying power level changes over the range from full-load to no-load.

ddition, the control rod system provides the minimum shutdown margin under Condition I nts and is capable of making the core subcritical rapidly enough to prevent exceeding 28/18 4.3-4 Rev. 31

boron system can compensate for all xenon burnout reactivity changes and will maintain the tor in the cold shutdown condition. Thus, backup and emergency shutdown provisions are vided by a mechanical and a chemical shim control system which satisfies GDC-26.

is en fuel assemblies are in the pressure vessel and the vessel head is not in place, keff will be ntained at or below 0.95 by control rods and soluble boron. Further, the fuel will be ntained sufficiently subcritical that removal of all rod cluster control assemblies will not result riticality.

cussion SI Standard N18.2 specifies a keff not to exceed 0.95 in spent fuel storage racks and transfer ipment flooded with pure water and a keff not to exceed 0.98 in normally dry new fuel storage s, assuming optimum moderation. No criterion is given for the refueling operation. However, percent margin, which is consistent with spent fuel storage and transfer and the new fuel age, is adequate for the controlled and continuously monitored operations involved.

boron concentration required to meet the refueling shutdown criteria is specified in the hnical Specifications. Verification of this shutdown criteria, including uncertainties, is ieved using standard design methods, such as the PHOENIX-P and ANC codes. The criticality of the core is continuously monitored as described in the Technical Specifications.

1.6 Stability is core will be inherently stable to power oscillations at the fundamental mode. This satisfies C-12.

tial power oscillations within the core with a constant core power output, should they occur, be reliably and readily detected and suppressed.

cussion illations of the total power output of the core, from whatever cause, are readily detected by the p temperature sensors and by the nuclear instrumentation. The core is protected by these ems, and a reactor trip would occur if power unacceptably increased, preserving the design gins to fuel design limits. The stability of the turbine/steam generator/core systems and the tor control system is such that total core power oscillations are not normally possible. The 28/18 4.3-5 Rev. 31

core is designed so that diametral and azimuthal oscillations due to spatial xenon effects are

-damping, and no operator action or control action is required to suppress them. The stability iametral oscillations is so great that this excitation is highly improbable. Convergent muthal oscillations can be excited by prohibited motion of individual control rods. Such llations are readily observable and alarmed, using the excore long ion chambers. Indications also continuously available from incore thermocouples and loop temperature measurements.

vable incore detectors can be activated to provide more detailed information. In all proposed s, these horizontal plane oscillations are self-damping by virtue of reactivity feedback effects gned into the core.

wever, axial xenon spatial power oscillations may occur late in core life. The control bank and ore detectors are provided for control and monitoring of axial power distributions.

urance that fuel design limits are not exceeded is provided by reactor Overpower T and rtemperature T trip functions which use the measured axial power imbalance as an input.

ection and suppression of xenon oscillations are discussed in Section 4.3.2.7.

1.7 Anticipated Transients Without SCRAM effects of anticipated transients with failure to trip are not considered in the design bases of plant. Analysis has shown that the likelihood of such a hypothetical event is negligibly small.

thermore, analysis of the consequences of hypothetical failure to trip following anticipated sients has shown that no significant core damage would result, system peak pressures would imited to acceptable values, and no failure of the reactor coolant system would result CAP-8330, Reference 4.3-40). A description of the Anticipated Transient Without Scram igation System Actuation Circuitry (AMSAC) is provided in Section 7.8.

2 DESCRIPTION 2.1 Nuclear Design Description reactor core consists of a specified number of fuel rods which are held in bundles by spacer s and top and bottom fittings. The fuel rods are constructed of cylindrical Zircaloy-4, ZIRLO ptimized ZIRLO tubes containing UO2 fuel pellets. The bundles, known as fuel assemblies, arranged in a pattern which approximates a right circular cylinder.

h fuel assembly contains a 17 x 17 rod array composed of 264 fuel rods, 24 rod cluster control bles, and an incore instrumentation thimble. Figure 4.2-1 shows a cross-sectional view of a 17 fuel assembly and the related rod cluster control locations. Further details of the fuel mbly are given in Section 4.2.

initial core loading, the fuel rods within a given assembly have the same uranium enrichment oth the radial and axial planes. Fuel assemblies of three different enrichments are used in the 28/18 4.3-6 Rev. 31

interspersed so as to form a checkerboard pattern in the central portion of the core. The third on is arranged around the periphery of the core and contains the highest enrichment. The chments for Millstone 3 are shown in Table 4.3-1.

pical reload core loading pattern will be a low-leakage pattern in order to achieve an eased cycle length and a reduced fluence at the periphery of the core. The exact reloading ern, initial and final positions of assemblies, and the number of fresh assemblies and their ement are dependent on the energy requirement for the next cycle and burnup and power ories of the previous cycles. The figures presented throughout Section 4.3.2, unless designated rwise, show typical values for normal 4-loop operation.

core average enrichment is determined by the amount of fissionable material required to vide the desired core lifetime and energy requirements. The physics of the burnout process is h that operation of the reactor depletes the amount of fuel available due to the absorption of trons by the U-235 atoms and their subsequent fission. In addition, the fission process results he formation of fission products, some of which readily absorb neutrons. These effects, letion, and the buildup of fission products, are partially offset by the buildup of plutonium m the non-fission absorption of neutrons in U-238, as shown on Figure 4.3-2 for a typical 17 fuel assembly. Therefore, at the beginning of any cycle, a reactivity reserve equal to the letion of the fissionable fuel and the buildup of fission product poisons over the specified le life must be built into the reactor. This excess reactivity is controlled by removable tron absorbing material in the form of boron dissolved in the primary coolant and burnable orbers.

concentration of the soluble neutron absorber is varied to compensate for reactivity changes to fuel burnup, fission product poisoning, including xenon and samarium, burnable absorbers letion, and the cold-to-operating moderator temperature change. Using its normal makeup

, the chemical and volume control system (CVCS) is typically capable of inserting negative tivity at a rate of approximately 30 pcm/min when the reactor coolant boron concentration is 00 ppm and approximately 35 pcm/min when reactor coolant boron concentration is 100 ppm.

e emergency boration path is used, the CVCS is typically capable of inserting negative tivity at a rate of approximately 65 pcm/min when the reactor coolant concentration is 00 ppm and approximately 75 pcm/min when the reactor coolant boron concentration is 100

. The peak burnout rate for xenon is typically 25 pcm/min (Section 9.3.4 discusses the ability of the CVCS to counteract xenon decay). The actual cycle dependent analysis ormed to confirm the adequate boration flow from the CVCS is known as the BORDER lysis. It employs reload-specific design information and is a coordinated analysis among eral design groups. The methods employed are described in WCAP-14441 (Reference 4.3-41).

id transient reactivity requirements and safety shutdown requirements are met with control s.

he boron concentration is increased, the moderator temperature coefficient becomes less ative. The use of a soluble boron alone would result in a positive moderator coefficient at inning-of-life. Therefore, burnable absorber rods are used in the first core to sufficiently 28/18 4.3-7 Rev. 31

m of rodded assemblies or IFBA (see Section 4.2.2.3.2). During operation, the absorber tent in these rods is depleted, thus adding positive reactivity to offset some of the negative tivity from fuel depletion and fission product buildup. The depletion rate of the burnable orber rods is not critical since chemical shim is always available and flexible enough to cover possible deviations in the expected burnable absorber depletion rate.

ure 4.3-3 is a plot of typical core depletion with and without burnable absorbers. Note that n at end-of-life conditions, some residual absorber remains resulting in a net decrease in the cycle lifetime.

ddition to reactivity control, the burnable absorbers are strategically located to provide a orable radial power distribution. Figure 4.3-4 shows the typical burnable absorber ributions within a fuel assembly for assemblies with IFBA. The initial core burnable absorber ing pattern is shown on Figure 4.3-5. A typical reload core using IFBA is shown on ure 4.3-5a.

les 4.3-1 through 4.3-3 contain summaries of the reactor core design parameters for the first cycle, including reactivity coefficients, delayed neutron fraction, and neutron lifetimes.

ficient information is included to permit an independent calculation of the nuclear ormance characteristics of the core.

2.2 Power Distributions accuracy of power distribution calculations has been confirmed through approximately 1,000 maps during some 20 years of operation under conditions very similar to those expected.

ails of this confirmation are given in WCAP-7308 (Reference 4.3-2) and in Section 4.3.2.2.7.

2.2.1 Definitions er distributions are quantified in terms of hot channel factors. These factors are a measure of peak pellet power within the reactor core and the total energy produced in a coolant channel, tive to the total reactor power output, and are expressed in terms of quantities related to the lear or thermal design, namely:

Power density is the thermal power produced per unit volume of the core (kW/liter).

Linear power density is the thermal power produced per unit length of active fuel (kW/ft).

Since fuel assembly geometry is standardized, this is the unit of power density most commonly used. For all practical purposes, it differs from kW/liter by a constant factor which includes geometry and the fraction of the total thermal power which is generated in the fuel rod.

Average linear power density is the total thermal power produced in the fuel rods divided by the total active fuel length of all rods in the core.

28/18 4.3-8 Rev. 31

parameters, this differs from linear power density by a constant factor.

Rod power or rod integral power is the length integrated linear power density in one rod (kW).

Average rod power is the total thermal power produced in the fuel rods divided by the number of fuel rods (assuming all rods have equal length).

hot channel factors used in the discussion of power distributions in this section are defined as ows:

FQ, heat flux hot channel factor, is defined as the maximum local heat flux on the surface of a fuel rod divided by the average fuel rod heat flux, allowing for manufacturing tolerances on fuel pellets and rods.

FQN, nuclear heat flux hot channel factor, is defined as the maximum local fuel rod linear power density divided by the average fuel rod linear power density, assuming nominal fuel pellet and rod parameters.

FQE, engineering heat flux hot channel factor, is the allowance on heat flux required for manufacturing tolerances. The engineering factor allows for local variations in enrichment, pellet density and diameter, surface area of the fuel rod, and eccentricity of the gap between pellet and clad. Statistically combined, the net effect is a factor of 1.03 to be applied to fuel rod surface heat flux.

FNH, nuclear enthalpy rise hot channel factor, is defined as the ratio of the integral of linear power along the rod with the highest integrated power to the average rod power.

Manufacturing tolerances, hot channel power distribution, and surrounding channel power distributions are explicitly treated in the calculation of the DNBR described in Section 4.4.

It is convenient for the purposes of discussion to define subfactors of FQ. However, design limits are set in terms of the total peaking factor.

FQ = Total peaking factor or heat flux hot channel factor

= (Maximum kW/ft) ÷ (Average kW/ft

= FNQ x FEQ

= FNXY x FNZ x FNU x FEQ 28/18 4.3-9 Rev. 31

FNQ and FEQ are defined above FNU = factor for measurement conservatism to be 1.05 is employed.

FNXY = ratio of peak power density to average power density in the horizontal plane of peak local power FNZ = ratio of the power per unit core height in the horizontal plane of peak local power to the average value of power per unit core height. If the plane of peak local power coincides with the plane of maximum power per unit core height, the FNZ is the core average axial peaking factor.

2.2.2 Radial Power Distributions power shape in horizontal sections of the core at full power is a function of the fuel assembly burnable absorber loading patterns, the control rod pattern, and the fuel burnup distribution.

s, at any time in the cycle, a horizontal section of the core can be characterized as unrodded or h group D control rods. These two situations, combined with burnup effects, determine the al power shapes which can exist in the core at full power. Typical values of FNXY are the al factors (BOL to EOL) given in Table 4.3-2, Sheet 2. The effect on radial power shapes of er level, xenon, samarium, and moderator density effects are also considered but these are e small. The effect of nonuniform flow distribution is negligible. While radial power ributions in various planes of the core are often illustrated, since the moderator density is portioned to enthalpy, the core radial enthalpy rise distribution, as determined by the integral ower up each channel, is of greater interest.

ce the position of the hot channel varies from time to time, a single reference radial design er distribution is selected for DNB calculations. This reference power distribution is servatively chosen to concentrate power in one area of the core, minimizing the benefits of redistribution. Assembly powers are normalized to core average power. The radial power ribution within a fuel rod and its variation with burnup as utilized in thermal calculations and rod design is discussed in Section 4.4.

2.2.3 Assembly Power Distributions ce the detailed power distribution surrounding the hot channel varies from time to time, a servatively flat radial assembly power distribution is assumed in the DNB analysis, described ection 4.4, with the rod of maximum integrated power artificially raised to the design value of H. Care is taken in the nuclear design of all fuel cycles and all operating conditions to ensure a flatter assembly power distribution does not occur with limiting values of FNH.

28/18 4.3-10 Rev. 31

shape of the power profile in the axial, or vertical, direction is largely under the control of the rator through either the manual operation of the control rods or automatic motion of rods onding to manual operation of the CVCS. Nuclear effects which cause variations in the axial er shape include moderator density, Doppler effect on resonance absorption, spatial ribution of xenon, and burnup. Automatically controlled variations in total power output and length rod motion are also important in determining the axial power shape at any time.

nals are available to the operator from the excore ion chambers, which are long ion chambers ide the reactor vessel running parallel to the axis of the core. Separate signals are taken from top and bottom halves of the chambers. The difference between top and bottom signals from h of four pairs of detectors is displayed on the control panel and called the flux difference, I.

culations of the core average peaking factor for many plants and measurements from operating ts under many operating situations are associated with either I or axial offset in such a way an upper bound can be placed on the peaking factor. For these correlations, axial offset is ned as:

axial offset = (t - b) ÷ (t + b) t and b are the top and bottom detector readings.

applicability of the separability assumption is ensured through extensive three dimensional ulations of possible rodded conditions. As an example, Figure 4.3-17 compares the axial er distribution for several assemblies at different distances from inserted control rods with the average distribution.

only significant difference from the average occurs in the low power peripheral assemblies, confirming the validity of the separability assumption.

2.2.5 Local Power Peaking l densification, which has been observed to occur under irradiation in several operating tors, causes the fuel pellets to shrink both axially and radially. The pellet shrinkage combined h random hang-up of fuel pellets can result in gaps in the fuel column when the pellets below hung-up pellet settle in the fuel rod. Axial gaps greater than 0.5 inches can lead to cladding apse which can then result in significant flux and power spiking. A quantitative measure of the l power peaking which results from pellet densification is represented by the power spike or S(Z), where Z is the axial location in the core.

t creep collapse methods have assumed that pellet hang-up occurs and an axial gap exists in all rods within a reactor core. The size of the gap is estimated from conservative early-in-life densification as determined from out-of-reactor sintering tests described in Regulatory Guide

6. The size of the axial gap also determines the magnitude of the power spike factor applied estinghouse fuel designs. In WCAP-13589-A (Reference 4.3-3), it has been demonstrated no large axial gaps, i.e., > 0.3 inches, form in current Westinghouse fuel designs. In the AP submittal, it was also shown that axial gaps less than 0.5 inches do not result in cladding 28/18 4.3-11 Rev. 31

ger necessary for Westinghouse fuel designs.

2.2.6 Limiting Power Distributions ording to the ANSI classification of plant conditions (Chapter 15), Condition I occurrences those which are frequently or regularly expected in the course of power operation, ntenance, or maneuvering of the plant. As such, Condition I occurrences are accommodated h margin between any plant parameter and the value of that parameter which would require er automatic or manual protective action. Inasmuch as Condition I occurrences frequently or ularly occur, they must be considered from the point of view of affecting the consequences of t conditions (Conditions II, III, and IV). In this regard, analysis of each fault condition cribed is generally based on a conservative set of initial conditions corresponding to the most erse set of conditions which can occur during Condition I operation.

list of steady state and shutdown conditions, permissible deviations, and operational sients is given in Chapter 15. Implicit in the definition of normal operation is proper and ely action by the reactor operator. That is, the operator follows recommended operating cedures for maintaining appropriate power distributions and takes any necessary remedial ons when alerted to do so by the plant instrumentation. Thus, as stated above, the worst or ting power distribution which can occur during normal operation is to be considered as the ting point for analysis of Conditions II, III, and IV events.

roper procedural actions or errors by the operator are assumed in the design as occurrences of derate frequency (Condition II). Some of the consequences which might result are discussed in pter 15. Therefore, the limiting power shapes which result from such Condition II events are e power shapes which deviate from the normal operating condition at the recommended axial et band, e.g., due to lack of proper action by the operator during a xenon transient following a nge in power level brought about by control rod motion. Power shapes which fall in this gory are used for determination of the reactor protection system setpoints so as to maintain gin to overpower or DNB limits.

means for maintaining power distributions within the required hot channel factor limits are cribed in the Technical Specifications. The calculations used to establish the limits on core er distribution are described in References 4.3-6, 4.3-7, and 4.3-42. All of the nuclear effects ch influence the radial and/or axial power distributions throughout core life for various modes peration, including load follow, reduced power operation, and axial xenon transients are sidered.

ial power distributions are calculated for the full power condition and fuel, and moderator perature feedback effects are included for the average enthalpy plane of the reactor. The dy state nuclear design calculations are done for normal flow with the same mass flow in each nnel and flow redistribution effects neglected. The effect of flow redistribution is explicitly ulated where it is important in the DNB analysis of accidents. The effect of xenon on radial er distribution is small but is included as part of the normal design process.

28/18 4.3-12 Rev. 31

nts of closest approach to axial power distribution limits, several thousand cases are examined.

ce the properties of nuclear design dictate what axial shapes can occur, boundaries on the ts of interest can be set in terms of the parameters which are readily observed on the plant.

cifically, the nuclear design parameters which are significant to the axial power distribution lysis are:

1. Core power level.

2. Core height.

3. Coolant temperature and flow.

4. Coolant temperature program as a function of reactor power.

5. Fuel cycle lifetimes.

6. Rod bank worths.

7. Rod bank overlaps.

mal operation of the plant assumes compliance with the following conditions:

1. Control rods in a single bank move together with no individual rod insertion differing by more than 12 steps (indicated) from the bank demand position.

2. Control banks are sequenced with overlapping banks.

3. The full length control bank insertion limits are not violated.

4. Axial power distribution control procedures, which are given in terms of flux difference control and control bank position, are observed.

axial power distribution procedures referred to above are part of the required operating cedures which are followed in normal operation. Briefly, they require control of the axial et (flux difference divided by fractional power) at all power levels within a permissible rating band.

culations are performed for normal operation of the reactor, including load following euvers. Beginning-, middle-, and end-of-cycle conditions are included in the calculations.

se cases represent many possible reactor states in the life of one fuel cycle, and they have been sen as sufficiently definitive of the cycle. It is not possible to single out any transient or steady e condition which defines the most limiting case. It is not even possible to separate out a small ber which form an adequate analysis. The process of generating a myriad of shapes is 28/18 4.3-13 Rev. 31

calculated power distributions are the result of power level and control rod configurations run h reconstructed axial xenon distributions. The specific xenon distributions are preconditioned he presence of control rods and then allowed to redistribute for several hours. A detailed ussion of the method used to generate allowable xenon conditions may be found in erences 4.3-6, 4.3-7, and 4.3-42.

envelope drawn over the calculated normalized max (FQ (Z) x Power) points on Figure 4.3-as specified in the Technical Specifications, represents an upper bound envelope on local er density versus elevation in the core. The calculated values have been increased by the lear uncertainty factor FNU of 1.05 for conservatism and a factor of 1.03 for the engineering or FEQ. It should be emphasized that this envelope is a conservative representation of the nding values of local power density. Expected values are considerably smaller.

owing for fuel densification effects, the average linear power at 3,650 MW is 5.827 kW/ft.

m Figure 4.3-21, the conservative upper bound value of normalized local power density, uding uncertainty allowances, is 2.6, corresponding to a peak linear power of 15.45 kW/ft at percent power.

confirmation of protection system setpoints with respect to power distributions is described eferences 4.3-6, 4.3-7, and 4.3-42. Three categories of events are considered: rod control ipment malfunctions, operating errors of commission, and operator errors of omission. When luating the required setpoints the core is assumed to be operating within the four constraints cribed above.

first category comprises uncontrolled rod withdrawal (with rods moving in the normal bank uence) for full length banks. Also included are motions of the full length banks below their rtion limits, which could be caused, for example, by uncontrolled dilution or primary coolant ldown. Power distributions were calculated throughout these occurrences, assuming short corrective action. That is, no transient xenon effects were considered to result from the function. The event was assumed to occur from typical normal operating situations, which ude normal xenon transients. It was further assumed in determining the power distributions the total core power level would be limited by reactor trip below 121 percent. Since the study determine protection limits with respect to power and axial offset, no credit was taken for trip oint reduction due to flux difference. The peak power density which can occur in such events, ming reactor trip at or below 121 percent, is less than that required for center line melt, uding uncertainties.

second category assumes that the operator mispositions the full-length rod bank in violation he insertion limits and creates short-term conditions not included in normal operating ditions.

28/18 4.3-14 Rev. 31

vided the assumed error in operation does not continue for a period which is long compared to xenon time constant.

required Overpower T and Overtemperature T reactor trip setpoints as a function of power flux difference are cycle dependent. The peak power density which can occur in the core ming reactor trip at the Overpower T reactor trip setpoint is less than that required for ter-line melt including uncertainties. Similarly, assuming the reactor is tripped at the rtemperature T setpoint, the minimum DNBR during events for which the Overtemperature provides protection will be greater than the safety analysis limit value.

ould be noted that a reactor overpower accident is not assumed to occur coincident with an pendent operator error. Additional detailed discussion of these analyses is presented in erences 4.3-6, 4.3-7, and 4.3-42.

can be increased with decreasing power, as shown in the Technical Specifications. Increasing H with decreasing power is permitted by the DNB protection setpoints and allows radial er shape changes with rod insertion to the insertion limits, as described in Section 4.4.4.3.

allowance for increased FNH permitted is cycle-dependent and is shown in the Core rating Limits Report. Typical radial factors and radial power distributions used in the analysis discussed in References 4.3-8 and 4.3-42. The worst values generally occur when the rods are med to be at their insertion limits. These FNH are taken as input to the thermal hydraulic lysis as described in Section 4.4.4.3.1.

en a situation is possible in normal operation which could result in local power densities in ess of those assumed as the precondition for a subsequent hypothetical accident, but which ld not itself cause fuel failure, administrative controls and alarms are provided for returning core to a safe condition. These alarms are described in detail in Chapter 7.

2.2.7 Experimental Verification of Power Distribution Analysis s subject is discussed in depth in WCAP-7308 (Reference 4.3-2). A summary of this report is n below. It should be noted that power distribution related measurements are incorporated the evaluation of calculated power distribution information, using an incore instrumentation cessing code described in WCAP-8498 (Reference 4.3-9). The measured versus calculational parison is normally performed periodically throughout the cycle lifetime of the reactor, as uired by Technical Specifications.

measurement of the heat flux hot channel factor, FQ, with the movable detector system cribed in Section 7.7.1 and 4.4.6, the following uncertainties have to be considered:

1. Reproduciblity of the measured signal.

28/18 4.3-15 Rev. 31

3. Errors in the calculated relationship between detector flux and peak rod power some distance from the measurement thimble.

appropriate allowance for category 1 above has been quantified by repetitive measurements e with several inter-calibrated detectors by using the common thimble features of the incore ctor system. This system allows more than one detector to access any thimble. Errors in gory 2 above are quantified to the extent possible, by using the detector current measured at thimble location to predict fluxes at another location, which is also measured. Local power ribution predictions are verified in critical experiments on arrays of rods with simulated guide bles, control rods, burnable poisons, etc. These critical experiments provide quantification of rs of categories 1 and 3 above.

AP-7308 (Reference 4.3-2) describes critical experiments performed at the Westinghouse ctor Evaluation Center and measurements taken on two Westinghouse plants with incore ems of the same type as used in the Millstone 3 plant. The report concludes that the ertainty associated with FQ (heat flux) is 3.9 percent at the 95 percent confidence level with y 5 percent of the measurements greater than the inferred value. This is the equivalent of 1.645 t on a normal distribution and is the uncertainty to be associated with a full core flux map with vable detectors reduced with a reasonable set of input data incorporating the influence of nup on the radial power distribution. The uncertainty is usually rounded up to 5 percent.

omparing measured power distributions (or detector currents) with calculations for the same rating conditions, it is not possible to isolate the detector reproducibility. Thus, a comparison ween measured and predicted power distributions has to include some measurement error.

h a comparison is given on Figure 4.3-24 for one of the maps used in WCAP-7308 ference 4.3-2). Since the first publication of WCAP-7308 (Reference 4.3-2), hundreds of s have been taken on these and other reactors. The results confirm the adequacy of the 5 ent uncertainty allowance on the calculated FQ.

imilar analysis for the uncertainty in FNH (rod integral power) measurements results in an wance of 3.65 percent at the equivalent of 1.645 confidence level. For historical reasons, an t percent uncertainty factor is allowed in the nuclear design calculational basis; that is, the dicted rod integrals at full power must not exceed the design FNH less 8 percent.

easurement in the second cycle of a 121 assembly, 12 foot, core is compared with a simplified dimensional core average axial calculation on Figure 4.3-25. This calculation does not give licit representation to the fuel grids.

accumulated data on power distributions in actual operation is basically of three types:

1. Much of the data is obtained in steady state operation at constant power in the normal operating configuration.

28/18 4.3-16 Rev. 31

3. Special tests have been performed in load follow and other transient xenon conditions which have yielded useful information on power distributions.

se data are presented in detail in WCAP-7912-P-A (Reference 4.3-8). Figure 4.3-26 contains mmary of measured values of FQ as a function of axial offset for five plants from that report.

2.2.8 Testing extensive series of physics tests will be performed on the first core. These tests and the criteria satisfactory results are described in Chapter 14. Since not all limiting situations can be created OL, the main purpose of the tests is to provide a check on the calculational methods used in predictions for the conditions of the test. Tests performed at the beginning of each reload cycle limited to verification of the selected safety- related parameters of the reload design.

2.2.9 Monitoring Instrumentation adequacy of instrument numbers, spatial deployment, required correlations between readings peaking factors, calibration, and errors are described in WCAP-7308 (Reference 4.3-2);

AP-7811 (Reference 4.3-6); and WCAP-7912-P-A (Reference 4.3-8). The relevant clusions are summarized in Sections 4.3.2.2.7 and 4.4.6.

vided the limitations given in Section 4.3.2.2.6 on rod insertion and flux difference are erved, the excore detector system provides adequate online monitoring of power distributions.

ther details of specific limits on the observed rod positions and flux difference are given in the hnical Specifications, together with a discussion of their bases.

its for alarms, reactor trip, etc., are given in the Technical Specifications Descriptions of the ems provided are given in Section 7.7.

2.3 Reactivity Coefficients kinetic characteristics of the reactor core determine the response of the core to changing plant ditions or to operator adjustments made during normal operation, as well as the core response ng abnormal or accidental transients. These kinetic characteristics are quantified in reactivity fficients. The reactivity coefficients reflect the changes in the neutron multiplication due to ying plant conditions, such as power, moderator or fuel temperatures, or pressure or void ditions, although the latter are relatively unimportant in the Millstone 3 reactor. Since tivity coefficients change during the life of the core, ranges of coefficients are employed in sient analysis to determine the response of the plant throughout life. The results of such ulations and the reactivity coefficients used are presented in Chapter 15. The reactivity fficients are calculated on a corewise basis by radial and axial diffusion theory methods. The ct of radial and axial power distribution on core average reactivity coefficients is implicit in e calculations and is not significant under normal operating conditions. For example, a 28/18 4.3-17 Rev. 31

ectively. An artificially skewed xenon distribution which results in changing the radial FNH 3 percent, changes the moderator and Doppler temperature coefficients by less than 0.03 /°F 0.001 pcm/°F, respectively. The spatial effects are accentuated in some transient conditions, example, in the postulated rupture of the main steam line and rupture of a rod cluster control mbly mechanism housing, as described in Sections 15.1.5 and 15.4.8.

analytical methods and calculational models used in calculating the reactivity coefficients are n in Section 4.3.3. These models have been confirmed through extensive testing of many s similar to the plant described herein; results of these tests are discussed in Section 4.3.3.

ntitative information for calculated reactivity coefficients, including fuel Doppler coefficient, derator coefficients (density, temperature, pressure, and void), and power coefficient is given he following sections.

2.3.1 Fuel Temperature (Doppler) Coefficient fuel temperature (Doppler) coefficient is defined as the change in reactivity per degree nge in effective fuel temperature and is primarily a measure of the Doppler broadening of 38 and Pu-240 resonance absorption peaks. Doppler broadening of other isotopes is also sidered but their contribution to the Doppler effect is small. An increase in fuel temperature eases the effective resonance absorption cross-sections of the fuel and produces a esponding reduction in reactivity.

fuel temperature coefficient is calculated by performing two-group calculations, using ANC.

erence 4.3-38. Moderator temperature is held constant, and the power level is varied. Spatial ation of fuel temperature is taken into account by calculating the effective fuel temperature as nction of power density, as discussed in Section 4.3.3.1.

pical Doppler temperature coefficient is shown on Figure 4.3-27 as a function of the effective temperature (at BOL and EOL conditions). The effective fuel temperature is lower than the ume averaged fuel temperature, since the neutron flux distribution is non-uniform through the et and gives preferential weight to the surface temperature. A typical Doppler-only tribution to the power coefficient, defined later, is shown on Figure 4.3-28 as a function of tive core power. The integral of the differential curve on Figure 4.3-28 is the Doppler tribution to the power defect and is shown on Figure 4.3-29 as a function of relative power.

Doppler coefficient becomes more negative as a function of life as the Pu-240 content eases, thus increasing the Pu-240 resonance absorption, but the overall value becomes less ative since the fuel temperature changes with burnup, as described in Section 4.3.3.1. The er and lower limits of Doppler coefficient used in accident analyses are given in Chapter 15.

28/18 4.3-18 Rev. 31

moderator coefficient is a measure of the change in reactivity due to a change in specific lant parameters, such as density, temperature, pressure, or void. The coefficients so obtained moderator density, temperature, pressure, and void coefficients.

derator Density and Temperature Coefficients moderator temperature (density) coefficient is defined as the change in reactivity per degree nge in the moderator temperature. Generally, the effects of the changes in moderator density, ell as the temperature, are considered together.

soluble boron used in the reactor as a means of reactivity control also has an effect on derator density coefficient, since the soluble boron poison density, as well as the water density, ecreased when the coolant temperature rises. A decrease in the soluble poison density oduces a positive component in the moderator coefficient. If the concentration of soluble on is large enough, the net value of the coefficient may be positive. With the burnable poison s present, however, the initial hot boron concentration is sufficiently low that the moderator perature coefficient is nonpositive at 100 percent power, less than or equal to a linear ramp m 0 pcm/°F at 100 percent power to +5.0 pcm/°F at 70 percent power, and less than or equal to 0 pcm/°F below 70 percent power. The effect of control rods is to make the moderator fficient more negative since the thermal neutron mean free path, and hence the volume cted by the control rods increases with an increase in temperature.

h burnup, the moderator coefficient becomes more negative, primarily as a result of boric acid tion, but also to a significant extent from the effects of the buildup of plutonium and fission ducts.

moderator coefficient is calculated for a range of plant conditions by performing two-group ulations, in which the moderator temperature (and density) is varied by about 5°F about each he mean temperatures. The moderator temperature coefficient is shown as a function of core perature and boron concentration for a typical unrodded and rodded core on Figures 4.3-30 ugh 4.3-32. The temperature range covered is from cold (68°F) to about 600°F. The tribution due to Doppler coefficient (because of change in moderator temperature) has been tracted from these results. Figure 4.3-33 shows the hot, full power moderator temperature fficient for a typical core plotted as a function of first cycle lifetime for the just critical boron centration condition based on the design boron letdown condition.

moderator coefficients presented here are calculated on a corewide basis, since they are used escribe the core behavior in normal and accident situations when the moderator temperature nges can be considered to affect the entire core.

28/18 4.3-19 Rev. 31

moderator pressure coefficient relates the change in moderator density, resulting from a tor coolant pressure change, to the corresponding effect on neutron production. This fficient is of much less significance in comparison with the moderator temperature coefficient.

hange of 50 psi in pressure has approximately the same effect on reactivity as a one-half ree change in moderator temperature This coefficient can be determined from the moderator perature coefficient by relating change in pressure to the corresponding change in density. The derator pressure coefficient is negative over a portion of the moderator temperature range at L (-0.004 pcm/psi, BOL) but is always positive at operating conditions and becomes more itive during life (+0.3 pcm/psi, EOL).

derator Void Coefficient moderator void coefficient relates the change in neutron multiplication to the presence of ds in the moderator. In a pressurized water reactor, this coefficient is not very significant ause of the low void content in the coolant. The core void content is less than one-half of rcent and is due to local or statistical boiling. The void coefficient typically varies from cm/percent void at BOL and at low temperatures to -250 pcm/percent void at EOL and at rating temperatures. The void coefficient at operating temperature becomes more negative h fuel burnup.

2.3.3 Power Coefficient combined effect of moderator temperature and fuel temperature change as the core power l changes is the total power coefficient and is expressed in terms of reactivity change per ent power change. A typical power coefficient at BOL and EOL conditions is given on ure 4.3-34.

ecomes more negative with burnup, reflecting the combined effect of moderator and fuel perature coefficients with burnup. The power defect (integral reactivity effect) at BOL and L is given on Figure 4.3-25.

2.3.4 Comparison of Calculated and Experimental Reactivity Coefficients tion 4.3.3 describes the comparison of calculated and experimental reactivity coefficients in il.

erimental evaluation of the reactivity coefficients will be performed during the physics startup s described in Chapter 14.

2.3.5 Reactivity Coefficients Used in Transient Analysis le 4.3-2 gives the limiting values, as well as the best estimate values, for reactivity fficients. The limiting values are used as design limits in the transient analysis. The exact 28/18 4.3-20 Rev. 31

fficients are appropriate, and whether spatial non-uniformity must be considered in the lysis. Conservative values of coefficients, considering various aspects of analysis, are used in transient analysis This is described in Chapter 15.

reactivity coefficients shown on Figures 4.3-27 thru 4.3-35 are typical best estimate values ulated for a first cycle. The limiting values, shown in Table 4.3-2, are chosen to encompass best estimate reactivity coefficients, including the uncertainties given in Section 4.3.3.3 over ropriate operating conditions calculated for the first cycle and the expected values for the sequent cycles. The most positive, as well as the most negative, values are selected to form the gn basis range used in the transient analysis. A direct comparison of the best estimate and gn limit values shown in Table 4.3-2 can be misleading since, in many instances, the most servative combination of reactivity coefficients is used in the transient analysis even though extreme coefficients assumed may not simultaneously occur at the conditions assumed in the lysis. The need for a reevaluation of any accident in a subsequent cycle is contingent upon ther or not the coefficients for that cycle fall within the identified range used in the analysis ented in Chapter 15 with due allowance for the calculational uncertainties given in tion 4.3.3.3. Control rod requirements are given in Table 4.3-3 for the core described and for a othetical equilibrium cycle, since these are markedly different. These latter numbers are vided for information only since refueling specifications for subsequent cycles have not yet n established. The actual values used for any given cycles safety analysis are properly umented in the Reload Safety Analysis Checklist. This document is jointly reviewed by eral organizations participating in the fuel design, characterization, safety analysis and rating recommendations which are supplied to MP-3 via approved design and operating uments.

2.4 Control Requirements ensure the shutdown margin stated in Technical Specifications under conditions where a ldown to ambient temperature is required, concentrated soluble boron is added to the coolant on concentrations for several core conditions are listed in Table 4.3-2. For all core conditions, uding refueling, the boron concentration is well below the solubility limit. The rod cluster trol assemblies are employed to bring the reactor to the hot shutdown condition. The minimum uired shutdown margin is given in the Technical Specifications.

ability to accomplish the shutdown for hot conditions is demonstrated in Table 4.3-3 by paring the difference between the rod cluster control assembly reactivity available with an wance for the worst stuck rod with that required for control and protection purposes. The tdown margin includes an allowance of 10 percent of analytic uncertainties (see tion 4.3.2.4.9). The largest reactivity control requirement appears at the EOL when the derator temperature coefficient reaches its peak negative value as reflected in the larger power ct.

control rods are required to provide sufficient reactivity to account for the power defect from power to zero power and to provide the required shutdown margin. The reactivity addition 28/18 4.3-21 Rev. 31

2.4.1 Doppler Doppler effect arises from the broadening of U-238 and Pu-240 resonance cross-sections h an increase in effective pellet temperature. This effect is most noticeable over the range of power to full power due to the large pellet temperature increase with power generation.

2.4.2 Variable Average Moderator Temperature en the core is shut down to the hot, zero power condition, the average moderator temperature nges from the equilibrium full load value determined by the steam generator and turbine racteristics (steam pressure, heat transfer, tube fouling, etc.) to the equilibrium no-load value, ch is based on the steam generator shell side design pressure. The nuclear fuel design cedures require that the change in temperature is conservatively increased by an appropriate unt to account for the control dead band and measurement errors documented in the cycle endent RSAC.

ce the moderator coefficient is negative for most of the cycle, there is a reactivity addition with er reduction. The moderator coefficient becomes more negative as the fuel depletes because boron concentration is reduced. This effect is the major contributor to the increased uirement at EOL.

2.4.3 Redistribution ing full power operation, the coolant density decreases with core height, and this, together h partial insertion of the control rods, results in less fuel depletion near the top of the core.

er steady state conditions, the relative power distribution will be slightly asymmetric toward bottom of the core. On the other hand, at hot zero power conditions, the coolant density is orm up the core, and there is no flattening due to Doppler. The result will be a flux ribution which, at zero power, can be skewed toward the top of the core. The reactivity rtion due to the skewed distribution is calculated with an allowance for effects of xenon ribution.

2.4.4 Void Content mall void content in the core is due to nucleate boiling at full power. The void collapse cidental with power reduction makes a small reactivity contribution.

2.4.5 Rod Insertion Allowance ull power, the control bank is operated within a prescribed band of travel to compensate for ll changes in boron concentration, changes in temperature, and very small changes in the on concentration not compensated for by a change in boron concentration. When the control k reaches either limit of this band, a change in boron concentration is required to compensate 28/18 4.3-22 Rev. 31

tivity.

2.4.6 Installed Excess Reactivity for Depletion ess reactivity is installed at the beginning of each cycle to provide sufficient reactivity to pensate for fuel depletion and fission product building throughout the cycle. This reactivity is trolled by the addition of soluble boron to the coolant and by burnable poisons. The soluble on concentration for several core configurations, the unit boron worth, and burnable poison th are given in Tables 4.3-1 and 4.3-2. Since the excess reactivity for burnup is controlled by ble boron and/or burnable poisons, it is not included in control rod requirements.

2.4.7 Xenon and Samarium Poisoning nges in xenon and samarium concentrations in the core occur at a sufficiently slow rate, even owing rapid power level changes, that the resulting reactivity change can be controlled by nging the soluble boron concentration (also see Section 4.3.2.4.16).

2.4.8 pH Effects nges in reactivity due to a change in coolant pH, if any, are sufficiently small in magnitude occur slowly enough to be controlled by the boron system. Further details are provided in mak et al. (Reference 4.3-12).

2.4.9 Experimental Confirmation owing a normal shutdown, the total core reactivity change during cooldown with a stuck rod been measured on a 121 assembly, 10 foot high core, and 121 assembly, 12 foot high core. In h case, the core was allowed to cool down until it reached criticality simulating the steam line k accident. For the 10 foot core, the total reactivity change associated with the cooldown is r-predicted by about 0.3 percent with respect to the measured result. This represents an error bout 5 percent in the total reactivity change and is about half the uncertainty allowance for this ntity. For the 12 foot core, the difference between the measured and predicted reactivity nge was an even smaller 0.2 percent . These measurements and others demonstrate the ity of the methods described in Section 4.3.3.

2.4.10 Control e reactivity is controlled by means of a chemical poison dissolved in the coolant, rod cluster trol assemblies, and burnable absorber rods, as described below.

2.4.11 Chemical Poison on in solution as boric acid is used to control relatively slow reactivity changes associated h:

28/18 4.3-23 Rev. 31

2. The transient xenon and samarium poisoning, such as that following power changes or changes in rod cluster control position.

3. The reactivity effects of fissile inventory depletion and buildup of long-life fission products.

4. The burnable absorber depletion.

boron concentrations for various core conditions are presented in Table 4.3-2.

2.4.12 Rod Cluster Control Assemblies number of rod cluster control assemblies is shown in Table 4.3-1. The rod cluster control mblies are used for shutdown and control purposes to offset fast reactivity changes associated h:

1. The required shutdown margin in the hot zero power, stuck rods condition.

2. The reactivity compensation as a result of an increase in power above hot zero power (power defect, including Doppler, and moderator reactivity changes).

3. Unprogrammed fluctuations in boron concentration, coolant temperature, or xenon concentration (with rods not exceeding the allowable rod insertion limits).

4. Reactivity ramp rates resulting from load changes.

allowed control bank reactivity insertion is limited at full power to maintain shutdown ability. As the power level is reduced, control rod reactivity requirements are also reduced, and e rod insertion is allowed. The control bank position is monitored, and the operator is notified n alarm if the limit is approached. The determination of the insertion limit uses conservative on distributions and axial power shapes. In addition, the rod cluster control assembly hdrawal pattern determined from these analyses is used in determining power distribution ors and in determining the maximum worth of an inserted rod cluster control assembly tion accident. For further discussion, refer to the Technical Specifications on rod insertion ts.

er distribution, rod ejection, and rod misalignment analyses are based on the arrangement of shutdown and control groups of the rod cluster control assemblies shown on Figure 4.3-36.

shutdown rod cluster control assemblies are withdrawn before withdrawal of the control ks is initiated. In going from zero to 100 percent power, control banks B, C, and D are uentially withdrawn. The limits of rod positions and further discussion on the basis for rod rtion limits are provided in the Technical Specifications.

28/18 4.3-24 Rev. 31

ctor coolant (or moderator) temperature control has added flexibility in reactivity control of Westinghouse pressurized water reactor. This feature takes advantage of the negative derator temperature coefficient inherent in a pressurized water reactor to:

1. Maximize return to power capabilities.

2. Provide +/-5 percent power load regulation capabilities.

3. Extend the time in cycle life to which daily load follow operations can be accomplished.

ctor coolant temperature control supplements the dilution capability of the plant by lowering reactor coolant temperature to supply positive reactivity through the negative moderator fficient of the reactor. After the transient is over, the system returns the reactor coolant perature to the programmed value.

derator temperature control of reactivity, like soluble boron control, has the advantage of not ificantly affecting the core power distribution. However, unlike boron control, temperature trol can be rapid enough to achieve reactor power change rates of 5 percent/minute.

2.4.14 Burnable Absorber Rods burnable absorber rods provide partial control of the excess reactivity available during the fuel cycle. These rods prevent the moderator temperature coefficient from being positive at power and exceeding a linear ramp of 0 pcm/°F at 100 percent power to +5.0 pcm/°F at percent power, and +5.0 pcm/°F below 70 percent power. They perform this function by ucing the requirement for soluble boron in the moderator at the beginning of the fuel cycle, as viously described. For purposes of illustration, a typical burnable absorber rod pattern in the

, together with the number of rods per assembly, are shown on Figure 4.3-5a, while the ngement within an assembly are displayed on Figure 4.3-4. The reactivity worth of these rods hown in Table 4.3-1. The boron in the rods is depleted with burnup at a sufficiently slow rate hat the resulting critical concentration of soluble boron is such that the moderator temperature fficient remains within the limits stated above at all times for power operating conditions.

2.4.15 Peak Xenon Startup mpensation for the peak xenon buildup is accomplished using the boron control system.

tup from the peak xenon conditions is accomplished with a combination of rod motion and on dilution. The boron dilution may be made at any time, including during the shutdown od, provided the shutdown margin is maintained.

28/18 4.3-25 Rev. 31

ing load follow maneuvers, power changes are accomplished using control rod motion and tion or boration by the boron system as required. Control rod motion is limited by the control insertion limits as provided in the Technical Specifications and discussed in tions 4.3.2.4.12 and 4.3.2.4.13. The power distribution is maintained within acceptable limits ugh location of the control bank. Reactivity changes due to the changing xenon concentration be controlled by rod motion and/or changes in the soluble boron concentration.

e in cycle life, extended load follow capability is obtained by augmenting the limited boron tion capability at low soluble boron concentrations by temporary moderator temperature uctions.

id power increases (5 percent/min) from part power during load follow operation are omplished with a combination of rod motion, moderator temperature reduction, and boron tion. Compensation for the rapid power increase is initially accomplished by a combination of withdrawal and moderator temperature reduction. As the slower boron dilution takes effect r the initial rapid power increase, the moderator temperature is returned to the programmed e.

2.4.17 Burnup trol of the excess reactivity for burnup is accomplished using soluble boron and/or burnable orbers. The boron concentration must be limited during operating conditions to ensure that the derator temperature coefficient is non-positive at 100 percent power, less than or equal to a ar ramp from 0 pcm/°F at 100 percent power to +5.0 pcm/°F at 70 percent power, and less or equal to +5.0 pcm/°F below 70 percent power. Sufficient burnable absorbers are installed he beginning of a cycle to give the desired cycle lifetime, without exceeding the boron centration limit. The practical minimum boron concentration is in the range of 0 to 10 ppm.

2.5 Control Rod Patterns and Reactivity Worth rod cluster control assemblies are designated by function as the control groups and the tdown groups. The terms group and bank are used synonymously throughout this report to cribe a particular grouping of control assemblies. The rod cluster assembly pattern is displayed Figure 4.3-36, which is not expected to change during the life of the plant. The control banks labeled A, B, C, and D and the shutdown banks are labeled SA, SB, SC, SD, and SE. Each k, although operated and controlled as a unit, is composed of two subgroups. The axial ition of the rod cluster control assemblies may be manually or automatically controlled. The cluster control assemblies are all dropped into the core following actuation of reactor trip als.

o criteria have been employed for selection of the control groups. First, the total reactivity th must be adequate to meet the requirements specified in Table 4.3-3. Second, in view of the that these rods may be partially inserted at power operation, the total power peaking factor uld be low enough to ensure that the power capability requirements are met. Analyses indicate 28/18 4.3-26 Rev. 31

owing movement of a single group of rods worth 3 to 4 percent . Therefore, four banks cribed as A, B, C, and D on Figure 4.3-36) have been selected. Typical control bank worths shown in Table 4.3-2.

position of control banks for criticality under any reactor condition is determined by the centration of boron in the coolant.

an approach to criticality, boron is adjusted to ensure that criticality will be achieved with trol rods above the insertion limit set by shutdown and other considerations (Technical cifications). Early in the cycle, there may also be a withdrawal limit at low power to maintain moderator temperature coefficient within allowed limits.

cted rod worths are given in Section 15.4.8 for several different conditions.

owable deviations due to misaligned control rods are discussed in the Technical Specifications.

epresentative calculation for two banks of control rods simultaneously withdrawn (rod hdrawal accident) is given on Figure 4.3-37.

culation of control rod reactivity worth versus time following reactor trip involves both trol rod velocity and differential reactivity worth. The rod position versus time of travel after release assumed is typified by Figure 4.3-38. For nuclear design purposes, the reactivity th versus rod position is calculated by a series of steady state calculations at various control positions, assuming all rods out of the core as the initial position in order to minimize the al reactivity insertion rate. Also, to be conservative, the rod of highest worth is assumed stuck of the core, and the flux distribution (and thus reactivity importance) is assumed to be skewed he bottom of the core. The result of these calculations is shown on Figure 4.3-39.

shutdown groups provide additional negative reactivity to assure an adequate shutdown gin. Shutdown margin is defined as the amount by which the core would be subcritical at hot tdown if all rod cluster control assemblies were tripped, but assuming that the highest worth mbly remains fully withdrawn and no changes in xenon or boron take place. The loss of trol rod worth due to the material irradiation is negligible, since only bank D may be in the under normal operating conditions (near full power).

values given in Table 4.3-3 illustrate that the typical available reactivity in the withdrawn rod ter control assemblies provides the design bases minimum shutdown margin. The highest th control rod cluster is assumed to remain at its fully withdrawn position. Actual cycle cific values are contained in the Nuclear Design Report. An allowance for the uncertainty in calculated worth of N-1 rods is made before determination of the shutdown margin.

28/18 4.3-27 Rev. 31

basis for maintaining the reactor subcritical during refueling is presented in Section 4.3.1.5, a discussion of how control requirements are met is given in Sections 4.3.2.4 and 4.3.2.5.

icality of fuel assemblies outside the reactor is precluded by adequate design of fuel transfer, ping and storage facilities, and by administrative control procedures. The principal methods reventing criticality are limiting the fuel assembly array size, limiting assembly interaction by ng the minimum separation between assemblies, use of neutron poisons, and use of minimum burnup requirements.

nt Fuel Pool design basis for preventing criticality in the spent fuel pool is that, considering possible ations, there is a 95 percent probability at a 95 percent confidence level that the effective tiplication factor (Keff) of the fuel assembly array will be less than 0.95 as recommended in SI N210-1976.

following are conditions assumed in meeting the design basis spent fuel pool Keff limit of

1. The criticality analysis considers the fuel assembly mechanical design of fuel stored in the spent fuel pool which will give the largest Keff.

2. The criticality analysis uses the fuel assembly reactivity for a particular Region of the spent fuel pool which is the maximum reactivity fuel assembly allowed for that Region of the spent fuel pool. The fuel assembly maximum reactivity is evaluated without credit for reduced enrichment axial blankets, control rods, or burnable poisons contained within the fuel. Credit for fuel burnup and fuel decay time may be used.

3. The moderator is pure water at the temperature within the design limits which yields the largest reactivity.

4. The array is either infinite in lateral extent, or is surrounded by a conservatively chosen reflector, whichever is appropriate to the design.

5. Mechanical uncertainties are treated by either using worst case conditions, or by performing sensitivity studies and obtaining appropriate uncertainties.

6. Credit may be taken for the neutron absorption in some structural materials, and credit may be taken for solid materials added specifically for neutron absorption.

7. Where borated water is present, credit for the dissolved boron is not taken, except under postulated accident conditions where the double contingency principle of 28/18 4.3-28 Rev. 31

8. When credit is taken for fuel burnup, uncertainties are considered for fuel assembly reactivity at a given burnup, uncertainty on measured fuel burnup, and a penalty is applied for fuel assembly reactivity changes due to axial burnup variations.

9. Credit may be taken for the reactivity loss of irradiated fuel due to the time the fuel has decayed since last irradiated in the reactor.

criticality design criteria are met when the calculated effective multiplication factor, plus the l uncertainty, is in conformance to the design basis listed above.

spent fuel pool criticality methods comply with:

(1) Code of Federal Regulations, Title 10, Part 50, Appendix A, General Design Criteria 62, Prevention of Criticality in Fuel Storage and Handling.

(2) USNRC Standard Review Plan, NUREG-0800, Section 9.1.2, Spent Fuel Storage, Rev 3, July 1981.

(3) USNRC letter of April 14, 1978 to all Power Reactor Licensees-OT Position for Review and Acceptance of Spent Fuel Storage and Handling Applications including modification letter dated January 18, 1979.

(4) ANSI N18.2-1973, Nuclear Safety Criteria for the Design of Stationary Pressurized Water Reactor Plants, Section 5.7, Fuel Handling System.

(5) ANSI N210-1976, Design Objectives for LWR Spent Fuel Storage Facilities at Nuclear Power Plants, Section 5.1.12.

(6) ANSI N16.9-1975, Validation of Calculational Methods for Nuclear Criticality Safety.

(7) ANSI/ANS 57.2-1983, Design Requirements for LWR Spent Fuel Storage Facilities at Nuclear Power Plants, Section 6.4.2.2.

w Fuel Storage Racks new fuel storage, the design basis for preventing criticality is that, considering possible ations, there is a 95 percent probability at a 95 percent confidence level that the effective tiplication factor (Keff) of the fuel assembly array when the new fuel racks are fully loaded h maximum reactivity fuel will be:

(1) less than 0.95 when flooded with potential moderators; and 28/18 4.3-29 Rev. 31

s design basis is consistent with the guidance of the USNRC Standard Review Plan, NUREG-0, Section 9.1.1, New Fuel Storage, Rev 2, July 1981.

following are conditions assumed in meeting the design basis new fuel storage Keff limit of when flooded with potential moderators, and 0.98 when surrounded by optimum moderation:

1. The criticality analysis uses the fuel assembly with the highest authorized enrichment. This does not take credit for reduced enrichment axial blankets, control rods, or burnable poisons contained within the fuel.

2. For the Keff limit of 0.95, the moderator is pure water at the temperature within the design limits which yields the largest reactivity.

3. For the Keff limit of 0.98, the optimum water density is calculated which yields the largest reactivity.

4. The array is either infinite in lateral extent, or is surrounded by a conservatively chosen reflector, whichever is appropriate to the design.

5. Mechanical uncertainties are treated by either using worst case conditions, or by performing sensitivity studies and obtaining appropriate uncertainties.

6. Credit may be taken for solid materials added specifically for neutron absorption.

7. Analyzed accident conditions must meet the same design basis criteria.

criticality design criteria are met when the calculated effective multiplication factor, plus the l uncertainty, is in conformance to the design basis listed above.

new fuel storage criticality methods comply with:

(1) Validation of Calculational Methods for Nuclear Criticality Safety, ANSI N16.9-1975, American Nuclear Society.

(2) USNRC Standard Review Plan, NUREG-0800, Section 9.1.1, New Fuel Storage, Rev 2, July 1981.

(3) USNRC letter of April 14, 1978 to all Power Reactor Licensees-OT Position for Review and Acceptance of Spent Fuel Storage and Handling Applications including modification letter dated January 18, 1979.

28/18 4.3-30 Rev. 31

2.7.1 Introduction stability of the pressurized water reactor cores against xenon-induced spatial oscillations and control of such transients are extensively discussed in WCAP-7811 (Reference 4.3-6);

AP-3680-20 (Reference 4.3-13); WCAP-3680-21 (Reference 4.3-14); and WCAP-3680-22 ference 4.3-15). A summary of these reports is given in the following discussion, and the gn bases are given in Section 4.3.1.6.

large reactor core, xenon induced oscillations can take place with no corresponding change in total power of the core. The oscillation may be caused by a power shift in the core which dly occurs by comparison with the xenon-iodine time constants. Such a power shift occurs in axial direction when a plant load change is made by control rod motion and results in a change he moderator density and fuel temperature distributions. Such a power shift could occur in the metral plane of the core as a result of abnormal control action.

to the negative power coefficient of reactivity, pressurized water reactor cores are inherently le to oscillations in total power. Protection against total power instabilities is provided by the trol and protection system, as described in Section 7.7. Hence, the discussion on the core ility will be limited here to xenon-induced spatial oscillations.

2.7.2 Stability Index er distributions, either in the axial direction or in the X-Y plane, can undergo oscillations due erturbations introduced in the equilibrium distributions without changing the total core power.

overtones in the current pressurized water reactors and the stability of the core against xenon uced oscillations can be determined in terms of the eigenvalues of the first flux overtones.

ting the eigenvalue of the first flux harmonic as:

= b + ic (4.3-1) b is defined as the stability index and T = 2 /c as the oscillation period of the first harmonic.

time-dependence of the first harmonic in the power distribution can now be represented (t) = A et = aebt cos ct (4.3-2) re A and a are constants. The stability index can also be obtained approximately by:

b = (1/T) In [(An + 1) ÷ (An)] (4.3-3) re An and An + 1 are the successive peak amplitudes of the oscillation and T is the time period ween the successive peaks.

28/18 4.3-31 Rev. 31

stability of the core described herein (i.e., with 17 x 17 fuel assemblies) against xenon-uced spatial oscillations is expected to be equal to or better than that of earlier designs for s of similar size. The prediction is based on a comparison of the parameters which are ificant in determining the stability of the core against the xenon-induced oscillations, namely:

the overall core size is unchanged and spatial power distributions will be similar, the moderator temperature coefficient is expected to be similar to or slightly more negative, and the Doppler coefficient of reactivity is expected to be equal to or slightly more negative at full power.

lysis of both the axial and X-Y xenon transient tests, discussed in Section 4.3.2.7.5, shows the calculational model is adequate for the prediction of core stability.

2.7.4 Stability Measurements

1. Axial measurements Two axial xenon transient tests conducted in a pressure water reactor with a core height of 12 feet and 121 fuel assemblies are reported in WCAP-7964 (Reference 4.3-16) and will be briefly discussed here. The tests were performed at approximately 10 percent and 50 percent of cycle life.

Both a free-running oscillation test and a controlled test were performed during the first test. The second test at mid cycle consisted of a free-running oscillation test only. In each of the free-running oscillation tests, a perturbation was introduced to the equilibrium power distribution through an impulse motion of the control bank D and the subsequent oscillation was monitored to measure the stability index and the oscillation period. In the controlled test conducted early in the cycle, the part-length rods were used to follow the oscillations to maintain an axial offset within the prescribed limits. The axial offset of power was obtained from the excore ion chamber readings (which had been calibrated against the incore flux maps) as a function of time for both free-running tests, as shown on Figure 4.3-40.

The total core power was maintained constant during these spatial xenon tests, and the stability index and the oscillation period were obtained from a least-square fit of the axial offset data in the form of Equation 4.3-2. The axial offset of power is the quantity that properly represents the axial stability in the sense that it essentially eliminates any contribution from even-order harmonics, including the fundamental mode. The conclusions of the tests are:

a. The core was stable against induced axial xenon transients, both at the core average burnups of 1,550 MWD/MTU and 7,700 MWD/MTU. The measured stability indices are -0.041 hr-1 for the first test (Curve 1 of 28/18 4.3-32 Rev. 31

40). The corresponding oscillation periods are 32.4 and 27.2 hours2.314815e-5 days <br />5.555556e-4 hours <br />3.306878e-6 weeks <br />7.61e-7 months <br />, respectively.

b. The reactor core becomes less stable as fuel burnup progresses and the axial stability index was essentially zero at 12,000 MWD/MTU. However, the movable control rod systems can control axial oscillations, as described in Section 4.3.2.7.

2. Measurements in the X-Y plane Two X-Y xenon oscillation tests were performed at a pressurized water reactor plant with a core height of 12 feet and 157 fuel assemblies. The first test was conducted at a core average burnup of 12,900 MWD/MTU. Both of the X-Y xenon tests show that the core was stable in the X-Y plane at both burnups. The second test shows that the core became more stable as the fuel burnup increased, and all Westinghouse pressurized water reactors with 121 and 157 assemblies are expected to be stable throughout their burnup cycles. The results of these tests are applicable to the 193 assembly Millstone 3 core, as discussed in Section 4.3.2.7.3.

In each of the two X-Y tests, a perturbation was introduced to the equilibrium power distribution through an impulse motion of one rod cluster control unit located along the diagonal axis. Following the perturbation, the uncontrolled oscillation was monitored, using the movable detector and thermocouple system and the excore power range detectors. The quadrant tilt difference (QTD) is the quantity that properly represents the diametral oscillation in the X-Y plane of the reactor core in that the differences of the quadrant average powers over two symmetrically opposite quadrants essentially eliminates the contribution to the oscillation from the azimuthal mode, The QTD data were fitted in the form of Equation 4.3-2 through least-square method. A stability index of -0.076 hr-1 with a period of 29.6 hours6.944444e-5 days <br />0.00167 hours <br />9.920635e-6 weeks <br />2.283e-6 months <br /> was obtained from the thermocouple data shown on Figure 4.3-41.

It was observed in the second X-Y xenon test that the pressurized water reactor core with 157 fuel assemblies had become more stable due to an increased fuel depletion, and the stability index was not determined.

2.7.5 Comparison of Calculations with Measurements analysis of the axial xenon transient tests was performed in an axial slab geometry, using a synthesis technique. The direct simulation of the axial offset data was carried out using the NDA code (WCAP-7084, 7757, Reference 4.3-1). The analysis of the X-Y xenon transient s was performed in an X-Y geometry, using a modified TURTLE code (WCAP-7213-A, 8-A, Reference 4.3-10). Both the PANDA and TURTLE codes solve the two-group time endent neutron diffusion equation with time dependent xenon and iodine concentrations. The 28/18 4.3-33 Rev. 31

basic nuclear cross-sections used in this study were generated from a unit cell depletion gram which has evolved from the codes LEOPARD (WCAP-3269-26, Reference 4.3-17) and DER (WCAP-TM-334, Reference 4.3-18). The detailed experimental data during the tests, uding the reactor power level, enthalpy rise, and the impulse motion of the control rod mbly, as well as the plant follow burnup data, were closely simulated in the study.

results of the stability calculation for the axial tests are compared with the experimental data able 4.3-5. The calculations show conservative results for both of the axial tests with a margin pproximately -0.01 hr-1, in the stability index.

analytical simulation of the first X-Y xenon oscillation test shows a calculated stability index 0.081 hr-1, in good agreement with the measured value of -0.076 hr-1. As indicated earlier, the ond X-Y xenon test showed that the core had become more stable compared to the first test, that no evaluation of the stability index was attempted. This increase in the core stability in X-Y plane due to increased fuel burnup is due mainly to the increased magnitude of the ative moderator temperature coefficient.

vious studies of the physics of xenon oscillations, including three dimensional analysis, are orted in the series of topical reports WCAP-3680-20 (Reference 4.3-13); WCAP-3680-21 ference 4.3-14); and WCAP-3680-22 (Reference 4.3-15). A more detailed description of the erimental results and analysis of the axial and X-Y xenon transient tests is presented in AP-7964 (Reference 4.3-16) and Section 1 of WCAP-8768 (Reference 4.3-19).

2.7.6 Stability Control and Protection excore detector system is utilized to provide indications of xenon-induced spatial oscillations.

readings from the excore detectors are available to the operator and also form part of the ection system.

1. Axial power distribution.

For maintenance of proper axial power distributions, the operator is instructed to maintain an axial offset within a prescribed operating band, based on the excore detector readings. Should the axial offset be permitted to move far enough outside this band, the protection limit will be reached, and the power will be automatically reduced.

Twelve-foot pressurized water reactor cores become less stable to axial xenon oscillations as fuel burnup progresses. However, free xenon oscillations are not allowed to occur, except for special tests. The full-length control banks are sufficient to dampen and control any axial xenon oscillations present. Should the axial offset be inadvertently permitted to move far enough outside the control band 28/18 4.3-34 Rev. 31

2. Radial power distribution.

The core described herein is calculated to be stable against X-Y xenon-induced oscillations at all times in life.

The X-Y stability of large pressurized water reactors has been further verified as part of the startup physics test program for pressurized water reactor cores with 193 fuel assemblies. The measured X-Y stability of the cores with 157 and 193 assemblies was in good agreement with the calculated stability, as discussed in Sections 4.3.2.7.4 and 4.3.2.7.5. In the unlikely event that X-Y oscillations occur, backup actions are possible and would be implemented, if necessary, to increase the natural stability of the core. This is based on the fact that several actions could be taken to make the moderator temperature coefficient more negative, which will increase the stability of the core in the X-Y plane.

Provisions for protection against non-symmetric perturbations in the X-Y power distribution that could result from equipment malfunctions are made in the protection system design. This includes control rod drop, rod misalignment, and asymmetric loss-of-coolant flow.

A more detailed discussion of the power distribution control in pressurized water reactor cores is presented in WCAP-7811 (Reference 4.3-6), WCAP-8385, 8403 (Reference 4.3-7) and WCAP-10216 (Reference 4.3-42).

2.8 Vessel Irradiation rief review of the methods and analyses used in the determination of neutron and gamma ray attenuation between the core and the pressure vessel is given below. A more complex ussion on the pressure vessel irradiation and surveillance program is given in Section 5.3.

materials that serve to attenuate neutrons originating in the core and gamma rays from both core and structural components consist of the core baffle, core barrel, neutron panels, and ciated water annuli, all of which are within the region between the core and the pressure sel.

eneral, few group neutron diffusion theory codes are used to determine fission power density ributions within the active core, and the accuracy of these analysis is verified by incore surements on operating reactors. Region and rodwise power-sharing information from the calculations is then used as source information in two dimensional Sn transport calculations ch compute the flux distributions throughout the reactor.

neutron flux distribution and spectrum in the various structural components varies ificantly from the core to the pressure vessel Representative values of the neutron flux 28/18 4.3-35 Rev. 31

long-term fluence projections and for correlation with radiation damage estimates.

discussed in Section 5.3, the irradiation surveillance program utilizes actual test samples to fy the accuracy of the calculated fluxes at the vessel.

3 ANALYTICAL METHODS culations required in nuclear design consist of three distinct types, which are performed in uence:

1. Determination of effective fuel temperatures;

2. Generation of microscopic few-group parameters;

3. Space dependent, few-group diffusion calculations.

se calculations are carried out by computer codes which can be executed individually. Most of codes required have been linked to form an automated design sequence which minimizes gn time, avoids errors in transcription of data, and standardizes the design methods.

3.1 Fuel Temperature (Doppler) Calculations peratures vary radially within the fuel rod, depending on the heat generation rate in the pellet, conductivity of the materials in the pellet, gap, and clad and the temperature of the coolant.

fuel temperatures for use in most nuclear design Doppler calculations are obtained from a plified version of the Westinghouse fuel rod design model described in Section 4.2.1.3, which siders the effect of radial variation of pellet conductivity, expansion coefficient and heat eration rate, elastic deflection of the clad, and a gap conductance which depends on the initial gas, the hot open gap dimension, and the fraction of the pellet over which the gap is closed.

fraction of the gap assumed closed represents an empirical adjustment used to produce close ement with observed reactivity data at beginning of life. Further gap closure occurs with nup and accounts for the decrease in Doppler defect with burnup which has been observed in rating plants. For detailed calculations of the Doppler coefficient, such as for use in xenon ility calculations, a more sophisticated temperature model is used, which accounts for the cts of fuel swelling, fission gas release, and plastic clad deformation.

ial power distributions in the pellet as a function of burnup are obtained from LASER CAP-6073, Reference 4.3-21) calculations.

effective U-238 temperature for resonance absorption is obtained from the radial temperature ribution by applying a radially dependent weighting function. The weighting function was rmined from REPAD (WCAP-2048, Reference 4.3-22) Monte Carlo calculations of nance escape probabilities in several steady state and transient temperature distributions. In 28/18 4.3-36 Rev. 31

e results.

effective Pu-240 temperature for resonance absorption is determined by a convolution of the al distribution of Pu-240 densities from LASER burnup calculations and the radial weighting ction. The resulting temperature is burnup dependent, but the difference between U-238 and 240 temperatures, in terms of reactivity effects, is small.

effective pellet temperature for pellet dimensional change is that value which produces the e outer pellet radius in a virgin pellet as that obtained from the temperature model. The ctive clad temperature for dimensional change is its average value.

temperature calculational model has been validated by plant Doppler defect data, as shown in le 4.3-7, and Doppler coefficient data, as shown in Figure 4.3-42. Stability index surements also provide a sensitive measure of the Doppler coefficient near full power ction 4.3.2.7).

3.2 Macroscopic Group Constants OENIX-P (WCAP-11596-P-A, Reference 4.3-23) and an improved version (ARK) of the OPARD (WCAP-3269-26, Reference 4.3-17) and CINDER (WAPD-TM-334, Reference 4.3-codes have been used for generating the macroscopic cross sections needed for the spatial few up codes. PHOENIX-P or other NRC approved lattice codes will be used for reload designs.

OENIX-P has been approved by the NRC as a lattice code for the generation of macroscopic microscopic few group cross sections for PWR analysis. PHOENIX-P is a two dimensional, tigroup, transport-based lattice code capable of providing necessary data for PWR analysis.

ce it is a dimensional lattice code, PHOENIX-P does not rely on pre-determined spatial/

ctral interaction assumptions for the heterogeneous fuel lattice and can provide a more urate multigroup spatial flux solution than versions (ARK) of LEOPARD/CINDER.

solution for the detailed spatial flux and energy distribution is divided into two major steps in OENIX-P. First, a two dimensional fine energy group nodal solution is obtained, coupling vidual subcell regions (e.g., pellet, clad and moderator) as well as surrounding pins, using a hod based on Carlviks collision probability approach and heterogeneous response fluxes ch preserve the heterogeneous nature of the pin cells and their surroundings. The nodal tion provides an accurate and detailed local flux distribution, which is then used to ogenize the pin cells spatially to few groups.

n, a standard S4 discrete ordinates calculation solves for the angular distribution based on the up-collapsed and homogenized cross sections from the first step. These S4 fluxes normalize detailed spatial and energy nodal fluxes, which are then used to compute reaction rates, power ributions and to deplete the fuel and burnable absorbers. A standard B1 calculation evaluates fundamental mode critical spectrum providing an improved fast diffusion coefficient for the spatial codes.

28/18 4.3-37 Rev. 31

during group collapse and to model important resonance parameters properly. It contains tronics data necessary for modeling fuel, fission products, cladding and structural materials, lant, and control and burnable absorber materials present in PWRs.

up constants for burnable absorber cells, control rod cells, guide thimbles and instrumentation bles, or other nonfuel cells, can be obtained directly from PHOENIX-P without any stments such as those required in the cell or 1-D lattice codes.

OENIX-P has been validated through an extensive qualification effort which includes ulation-measurement comparison of the Strawbridge-Barry critical experiments (See erences 4.3-25 and 4.3-26), the KRITZ high temperature criticals (Reference 4.3-27), the AEC nsored B&W criticals (References 4.3-28, 4.3-29, and 4.3-30) and measured actinide isotopic from fuel pins irradiated in the Saxton and Yankee Rowe cores (References 4.3-31 through 36). In addition, calculation-measurement comparisons have been made to operating reactor measured during startup tests and during normal power operation.

he ARK version of the LEOPARD and CINDER codes, the two codes are linked internally and vide burnup dependent cross-sections. A complete solution for the significant isotopes in the chains, from Th-232 to Cm-244, is used (See WCAP-6086, Reference 4.3-36). Fast and mal cross section library tapes contain microscopic cross-sections taken mostly from the DF/B (Reference 4.3-37) library, with a few exceptions where other data provided better ement with critical experiments, isotopic measurements, and plant critical boron values.

up constants for discrete burnable absorber cells, guide thimbles, instrument thimbles, and rassembly gaps are generated in a manner analogous to the fuel cell calculation.

dation of the cross section method is based on analyses of critical experiments, isotopic data, t critical boron concentration data, and control rod worth measurement data such as that wn in Table 4.3-10.

firmatory critical experiments on burnable absorber rods are described in WCAP-7806 ference 4.3-25).

3.3 Spatial Few-Group Diffusion Calculations 3D ANC code (see WCAP-10965-P-A, Reference 4.3-38) permits the introduction of anced fuel designs with axial heterogeneities, such as axial blankets and part-length burnable orbers, and allows such features to be modeled explicitly. The three dimensional nature of this e provides both radial and axial power distribution. For some applications, the updated version OLLO (see WCAP-13524, Reference 4.3-39of the PANDA code (see WCAP-7084-P-A, erence 4.3-1) will continue to be used for axial calculations, and a two dimensional collapse of ANC that properly accounts for the three dimensional features of the fuel is used for X-Y ulations. In the early stages of design a two dimensional few group dimension code RTISE, which is an updated version of TURTLE (see WCAP-7213A, Reference 4.3-10) was 28/18 4.3-38 Rev. 31

tial few group calculations are carried out to determine the critical boron concentrations and er distributions. The moderator coefficient is evaluated by varying the inlet temperature in the e kind of calculations as those used for power distribution and reactivity predictions.

dation of the reactivity calculations is associated with validation of the group constants mselves, as discussed in Section 4.3.3.2. Validation of the Doppler calculations is associated h the fuel temperature validation discussed in Section 4.3.3.1. Validation of the moderator fficient calculations is obtained by comparison with plant measurements at hot zero power ditions, similar to that shown in Table 4.3-11.

al calculations are used to determine differential control rod worth curves (reactivity versus insertion) and to demonstrate load follow capability. Group constants are obtained from the e dimensional nodal model by flux-volume weighting on an axial slicewise basis. Radial klings are determined by varying parameters in the buckling model while forcing the one ensional model to reproduce the axial characteristics (axial offset, midplane power) of the e dimensional model.

dation of the spatial codes for calculating power distributions involves the use of in-core and ore detectors and is discussed in Section 4.3.2.2.7.

discussed in Section 4.3.3.2 calculation-measurement comparisons have been made to rating reactor data measured during startup tests and during normal power operation. These parisons include a variety of core geometries and fuel loading patterns, and incorporate a onable range of fuel enrichment, burnable absorber loading, and cycle burnup. Qualification (WCAP-11596, Reference 4.3-23) indicates small mean and standard deviations relative to surement which are equal to or less than those found in previous reviews of similar or parallel roved methodologies. For the reload designs the spatial codes described above, other NRC roved codes, or both are used.

4 REFERENCES FOR SECTION 4.3 1 WCAP-7084-P-A (Proprietary) and WCAP-7757-A (Non-proprietary) 1975 Barry, R. F.

and Minton, G, The PANDA Code.

2 WCAP-7308-L-P-A (Proprietary), and WCAP-7308-L-A (Non-proprietary), E.M. Spier, June 1988, Evaluation of Hot Channel Factor Uncertainties.

3 WCAP-13589-A, March 1995, Davidson, S. L., Oelrich, R. L., Kersting, P. J.,

Assessment of Clad Flattening and Densification Power Spike Factor Elimination in Westinghouse Nuclear Fuel.

4 Reference Deleted 5 Reference Deleted 28/18 4.3-39 Rev. 31

7 WCAP-8385 (Proprietary) and WCAP-8403 (Non-proprietary), 1974, Morita, T. et al.,

Power Distribution Control and Load Following Procedures.

8 WCAP-7912-P-A (Proprietary) and WCAP-7912-A (Non-proprietary), 1975, McFarlane, A.F., Power Peaking Factors.

9 WCAP-8498, 1975, Meyer, C.E. and Stover, R.L., Incore Power Distribution Determination in Westinghouse Pressurized Water Reactors.

10 WCAP-7213-A (Proprietary) and WCAP-7758-A (Non-proprietary) 1975, Barry, R.F. and Altomare, S, The TURTLE 24.0 Diffusion Depletion Code.

11 WCAP-9485 (Non-proprietary) and WCAP-9486 (Proprietary), 1978, Camden, T.M.,

PALADON - Westinghouse Nodal Computer Code.

12 WCAP-3969-8 (EURAEC-2074), 1968, Cermak, J.O. et al., Pressurized Water Reactor pH-Reactivity Effect Final Report.

13 WCAP-3680-20 (EURAEC-1974) 1968, Poncelet, C.G. and Christie, A.M., Xenon--

Induced Spatial Instabilities in Large Pressurized Water Reactors.

14 WCAP-3680-21 (EURAEC-2111), 1969 Skogen, F.B. and McFarlane, A.F., Control Procedures for Xenon-Induced X-Y Instabilities in Large Pressurized Water Reactors.

15 WCAP-3680-22 (EURAEC-2116), 1969 Skogen, F.B. and McFarlane, A.F. Xenon-Induced Spatial Instabilities in Three-Dimensions.

16 WCAP-7964, 1971 Lee, J.C., et al., Axial Xenon Transient Tests at the Rochester Gas and Electric Reactor.

17 WCAP-3269-26, 1963 Barry, R.F, LEOPARD - A Spectrum Dependent Non-spatial Depletion Code for the IBM-7094.

18 WAPD-TM-334, 1962 England, T.R., CINDER - A One-Point Depletion and Fission Product Program.

19 WCAP-8768, Revision 2, 1978 Eggleston, F. R., Safety-Related Research Development for Westinghouse Pressurized Water Reactors, Program Summaries -Winter 1977 -

Summer 1978.

20 Rose, P. F., ENDF-201 ENDF/B-VI Summary Documentation, BNL-NC8-17541

[ENDF-201] 4th Edition [ENDF/B-VI], October 1999 and Supplements.

28/18 4.3-40 Rev. 31

22 WCAP-2048, July 1962, Olhoeft, J.E., The Doppler Effect for a Non-Uniform Temperature Distribution in Reactor Fuel Elements.

23 WCAP-11596-P-A, (Proprietary) June 1988, Nguyen, T. Q., et al., Qualification of the PHOENIX-P/ANC Nuclear Design System for Pressurized Water Reactor Cores.

24 WCAP-10841 (Proprietary), and WCAP-10842 (Non-proprietary), June 1985, Mildrum, C.M., Mayhue, L. T., Baker, M.M., and Isaac, P.G., Qualification of the PHOENIX/

POLCA Nuclear Design and Analysis Program for Boiling Water Reactors.

25 WCAP-7806, December 1971, Barry, R.F., Nuclear Design of Westinghouse Pressurized Water Reactors with Burnable Poison Rods.

26 Strawbridge, L.E., and Barry, R.F., Criticality Calculation for Uniform Water Moderated Lattices, Nuclear Science and Engineering 23, p. 58, 1965.

27 Persson, R., Blomsjo, E., and Edenius, M., High Temperature Critical Experimenets with H20 Moderated Fuel Assemblies in KRITZ, Technical Meeting No. 2/11, NUCLEX 72, 1972.

28 Baldwin, M.N., and Stern, M.E., Physics Verification Program Part III, Task 4: Summary Report, BAW-3647-20, March 1971.

29 Baldwin, M.N., Physics Verification Program Part III, Task 11: Quarterly Technical Report January-March 1974, BAW-3647-30, July 1974.

30 Baldwin, M.N., Physics Verification Program Part III, Task 11: Quarterly Technical Report July-September 1974, BAW-3647-31, February 1975.

31 WCAP-3385-56 Part II, July 1970, Nodvik, R.J., Saxton Core II Fuel Performance Evaluation Part II: Evaluation of Mass Spectrometric and Radiochemical Analyses of Irradiated Saxton Plutonium Fuel.

32 WCAP-3386-56, Part I, September 1971, Smalley, W.R., Saxton Core H - Fuel Performance Evaluation Part 1: Materials.

33 WCAP-3385-36, July 1973, Goodspeed, R.C., Saxton Plutonium Project - Quarterly Progress Report for the Period Ending June 20, 1973.

34 WCAP-3385-37, December 1973, Crain, H.H., Saxton Plutonium Project - Quarterly Progress Report for the Period Ending September 30, 1973.

28/18 4.3-41 Rev. 31

36 Nodvik, R.J., Supplementary Report on Evaluation of Mass Spectrometric and Radiochemical Analyses of Yankee Core I Spent Fuel, Including Isotopics of Elements Thorium Through Curium, WCAP-6086, August 1969.

37 Drake, M.K., ed, Data Formats and Procedure for the ENDF/B Neutron Cross Section Library, BNK-50274, ENDF-102, Vol. 1, 1970.

38 WCAP-10965-P-A, (Proprietary) September 1986, Davidson, S.L., ed. et. al., ANC:

Westinghouse Advanced Nodal Computer Code.

39 WCAP-13524 -P-A Revision 1, (Proprietary) September 1997, Yarbrough, M.B., Liu, Y.S.

Paterline, D.L., Hone, M.J., APOLLO - A One Dimensional Neutron Theory Program.

40 WCAP-8330, 1974, Westinghouse Anticipated Transients without Reactor Trip Analysis.

41 WCAP-14441, Rev. 0, August 1995, G. J. Corpora, BORDER Code Methodology.

42 WCAP-10216-P-A, Revision 1-A, Relaxation of Axial Offset Control: FQ Surveillance Technical Specifications, February 1994.

28/18 4.3-42 Rev. 31

tive Core Equivalent diameter (in) 132.7 Active fuel height, first core (in) 144 Height-to-diameter ratio 1.09 Total cross section area (ft2) 96.04 H2O/U molecular ratio, lattice (cold) 2.39 flector Thickness and Composition Top - water plus steel (in) 10 Bottom - water plus steel (in) 10 Side - water plus steel (in) 15 el Assemblies Number 193 Rod array 17 x 17 Rods per assembly 264 Rod pitch (in) 0.496 Overall transverse dimensions (in) 8.426 x 8.426 Fuel weight, as UO2 (lb) 222,645 Zircaloy weight (lb) 46,993 Number of grids per assembly 8-Type R Composition of Grids Inconel-718 Weight of seven grids, seven grids in active core 1842 (lb)

Number of guide thimbles per assembly 24 Composition of guide thimbles Zircaloy-4 Diameter of guide thimbles, upper part (in) 0.450 I.D. x 0.482 O.D.

28/18 4.3-43 Rev. 31

Diameter of guide thimbles, lower part (in) 0.397 I.D. x 0.429 O.D.

Diameter of instrument guide thimbles (in) 0.450 I.D. x 0.482 O.D.

el Rods Number 50,952 Outside diameter (in) 0.374 Diameter gap (in) 0.0065 Clad thickness (in) 0.0225 Clad material Zircaloy-4 el Pellets Material UO2 Sintered Density (percent of theoretical) 95 Fuel enrichments (weight percent)

Region 1 2.40 Region 2 2.90 Region 3 3.40 Diameter (in) 0.3225 Length (in) 0.530 Mass of UO2 per foot of fuel rod (lb/ft) 0.364 d Cluster Control Assemblies Neutron Absorber Hafnium or Ag-In-Cd Diameter (in) 0.341 Density (lb/in3) Hafnium 0.454 Cladding material Type 304, cold worked stainless steel Clad thickness (in) 0.0185 Number of clusters, full length 61 Number of absorber rods per cluster 24 28/18 4.3-44 Rev. 31

rnable Poison Rods (First Core)

Number 1846 Material Borosilicate Glass Outside diameter (in) 0.381 Inner tube, O.D. (in) 0.1815 Clad material Stainless Steel Inner tube material Stainless Steel Boron loading (w/o B203 in glass rod) 12.5 Weight of boron-10 per foot of rod (lb/ft) 0.00419 Initial reactivity worth (percent ) 8.1 (hot) 5.7 (cold) cess Reactivity Maximum fuel assembly k 1.41 (cold, clean unborated water)

Maximum core reactivity (cold, zero power, beginning of cycle, zero soluble 1.24 boron) 28/18 4.3-45 Rev. 31

Core average linear power, including densification effects (kW/ft) 5.45 Total heat flux hot channel factor, FQ 32 Nuclear enthalpy rise hot channel factor, FNH 1.55 Reactivity Coefficients (1) Design Limits Best Estimate Doppler-only power coefficients, (pcm/percent power) (1)

Upper curve -19.4 to -12.6 -15 to -10 Lower curve -10 to -6.7 -13 to -8 Doppler temperature coefficient (pcm/°F) (1) -2.9 to -1.0 -2.2 to -1.3 Moderator temperature coefficient (pcm/°F) (1) 0 to -40 0 to -35 Boron coefficient (pcm/ppm) (1) -16 to -7 -11.2 to -7.5 Rodded moderator density (pcm/gm/cc) (1) 0.43 x 10 0.38 x 10 Delayed Neutron Fraction and Lifetime effBOL, (EOL) 0.0075 (0.0044) l*, BOL, (EOL) sec 19.4 (18.1) 06/28/18 4.3-46 Rev. 31

Control Rods Rod requirements See Table 4.3-3 Maximum bank worth (pcm) < 2000 Maximum ejected rod worth Bank worth HZP no overlap (pcm) BOL, Xe free EOL Bank D 600 640 Bank C 1240 1160 Bank B 1240 1000 Bank A 1120 1180 Radial Factor HZP (BOL to EOL) Best Estimate Unrodded 1.43 to 1.26 D bank 1.69 to 1.41 D + C banks 1.63 to 1.41 D + C + B banks 1.68 to 1.64 Boron Concentrations (ppm)

Zero power, Keff = 0.99, cold (2), rod cluster control assemblies out 1690 Zero power, Keff = 0.99, hot (3), rod cluster control assemblies out 1660 Design basis refueling boron concentration 2000 Zero power, Keff 0.95, cold (2), rod cluster control assemblies in 1492 06/28/18 4.3-47 Rev. 31

Zero power, Keff = 1.00, hot (3), rod cluster control assemblies out 1543 Full power, no xenon, Keff = 1.0, hot, rod cluster control assemblies out 1398 Full power, equilibrium xenon, Keff = 1.0 hot rod cluster control assemblies out 1038 Reduction with fuel burnup First cycle (ppm/GWD/MTU) (4) See Figure 4.3-3 Reload cycle (ppm/GWD/MTU) ~100 Bounding lower value used for safety analysis.

NOTES:

1. 1 pcm = (percent mille) 10-5 where is calculated from two statepoint values of Keff by ln (k2/k1)

2. Cold means 68°F, 14.7 psia.

3. Hot means 557°F, 2250 psia.

4. Gigawatt day (GWD) = 1000 megawatt day (1000 MWD). During the first cycle, fixed burnable poison rods are present which significantly reduce the boron depletion rate compared to reload cycles.

5. Uncertainties are given in Section 4.3.3.3.

Bounding lower value used for safety analysis.

06/28/18 4.3-48 Rev. 31

CONTROL ASSEMBLIES Beginning End of End of Life of Life Life (Representative (First (First Equilibrium Reactivity Effects (Percent) Cycle) Cycle) Cycle)

Control requirements Fuel temperature, Doppler (percent ) 1.35 1.13 1.01 Moderator temperature (percent )* 0.20 1.14 1.17 Redistribution (percent ) 0.50 0.89 0.98 Rod insertion allowance (percent ) 0.50 0.50 0.50 2.55 3.61 3.75 Total control (percent )

Estimated rod cluster control assembly worth (61 rods)

All full-length assemblies inserted 8.95 8.49 7.91 a.

(percent )

All but one (highest worth) assemblies 7.64 7.35 6.68 b.

inserted (percent )

Estimated rod cluster control assembly credit 6.88 6.62 6.01 with 10 percent adjustment to accommodate uncertainties, Item 3b minus 10 percent (percent )

Shutdown margin available Item 4 minus 4.33 3.01 2.26 Item 2 (percent )

TES:

udes void effects.

design basis minimum shutdown is 1.3 percent .

28/18 4.3-49 Rev. 31

TABLE 4.3-4 OMITTED 28/18 4.3-50 Rev. 31

WITH A 12-FOOT HEIGHT Stability Index (hr-1)

Burnup (MWD/MTU) FZ CB(ppm) Exp Calc 1550 1.34 1065 -0.041 -0.032 7700 1.27 700 -0.014 -0.006 5090 * -0.0325 -0.0255 RADIAL STABILITY INDEX 2250 ** -0.068 -0.07 TES:

4-loop plant, 12-foot core in Cycle 1, axial stability test 4-loop plant, 12-foot core in Cycle 1, radial (X-Y) stability test 28/18 4.3-51 Rev. 31

0.111 Mev < E 0.3 eV E E >1.0 MeV < 1.0 MeV < 0.111 MeV < E 0.3 eV re center 9.98 x 1013 1.11 x 1014 2.17 x 1014 5.36 x 1013 re outer radius at d-height 4.24 x 1013 4.85 x 1013 9.52 x 1013 2.21 x 1013 re top, on axis 2.62 x 1013 2.13 x 1013 1.31 x 1014 4.35 x 1013 re bottom, on axis 2.70 x 1013 2.25 x 1013 1.33 x 1014 4.74 x 1013 essure vessel inner ameter aximuthal 2.08 x 1010 2.83 x 1010 6.18 x 1010 1.20 x 1011 ak, core mid-height 28/18 4.3-52 Rev. 31

DOPPLER DEFECTS Core Burnup Measured Calculated Plant Fuel Type (MWD/MTU) (pcm) * (pcm) 1 Air-filled 1800 1700 1710 2 Air-filled 7700 1300 1440 3 Air and helium-filled 8460 1200 1210 TE:

pcm = 10-5 x ln (K2/K1) 28/18 4.3-53 Rev. 31

TABLE 4.3-8 OMITTED 28/18 4.3-54 Rev. 31

TABLE 4.3-9 OMITTED 28/18 4.3-55 Rev. 31

2-Loop Plant, 121 Assemblies 10 Foot Core Measured (pcm) Calculated (pc Group B 1885 1893 Group A 1530 1649 Shutdown group 3050 2917 ESADA Critical, 0.69" Pitch, 2 w/o Pu02, 8 percent Pu-240, 9 Control Rods 6.21" rod separation 2250 2250 2.07" rod separation 4220 4160 1.38" rod separation 4100 4019 Benchmark Critical Experiment Hafnium Control Rod Worth No. of Fuel Rods Measured

• Worth Calculated

• Wo Control Rod Configuration (Dppm B-10) (Dppm B-10) 9 Hafnium Rods 1192 138.3 141.0 NOTE:

• Calculated and measured worths are given in terms of an equivalent change in B-10 concentration.

06/28/18 4.3-56 Rev. 31

MODERATOR COEFFICIENTS AT HZP, BOL Plant Type/ Measured iso

• Calculated iso Control Bank Configuration (pcm/°F) (pcm/°F) oop, 157 assemblies, foot core D at 160 steps -0.50 -0.50 D in, C at 190 steps -3.01 -2.75 D in, C at 28 steps -7.67 -7.02 B, C, and D in -5.16 -4.45 oop, 121 assemblies foot core D at 180 steps +0.85 +1.02 D in, C at 180 steps -2.40 -1.90 C and D in, B at 165 steps -4.40 -5.58 B, C and D in, A at 174 steps -8.70 -8.12 oop, 193 assemblies

-foot core ARO -0.52 -1.2 D in -4.35 -5.7 D and C in -8.59 -10.0 D, C, and B in -10.14 -10.55 D, C, B, and A in -14.63 -14.45 TE:

Isothermal coefficients, which include the Doppler effect in the fuel.

5 k iso = 10 ln --- / T°F k1 28/18 4.3-57 Rev. 31

28/18 4.3-58 Rev. 31 ISOTOPES 28/18 4.3-59 Rev. 31

ABSORBER RODS 06/28/18 4.3-60 Rev. 31

ARRANGEMENT WITHIN AN ASSEMBLY 28/18 4.3-61 Rev. 31

28/18 4.3-62 Rev. 31 28/18 4.3-63 Rev. 31 28/18 4.3-64 Rev. 31 28/18 4.3-65 Rev. 31 28/18 4.3-66 Rev. 31 28/18 4.3-67 Rev. 31 28/18 4.3-68 Rev. 31 28/18 4.3-69 Rev. 31 28/18 4.3-70 Rev. 31 28/18 4.3-71 Rev. 31 28/18 4.3-72 Rev. 31 28/18 4.3-73 Rev. 31 28/18 4.3-74 Rev. 31 DISTRIBUTION WITH CORE AVERAGE AXIAL DISTRIBUTION BANK D SLIGHTLY INSERTED 28/18 4.3-75 Rev. 31

28/18 4.3-76 Rev. 31 28/18 4.3-77 Rev. 31 28/18 4.3-78 Rev. 31 HEIGHT 28/18 4.3-79 Rev. 31

28/18 4.3-80 Rev. 31 28/18 4.3-81 Rev. 31 MEASURED RELATIVE FUEL ASSEMBLY POWER DISTRIBUTION 28/18 4.3-82 Rev. 31

06/28/18 4.3-83 Rev. 31 CONFIGURATIONS 28/18 4.3-84 Rev. 31

BEGINNING-OF-LIFE AND END-OF-LIFE, CYCLE 1 28/18 4.3-85 Rev. 31

BEGINNING-OF-LIFE AND END-OF-LIFE, CYCLE 1 28/18 4.3-86 Rev. 31

LIFE AND END-OF-LIFE, CYCLE 1 28/18 4.3-87 Rev. 31

BEGINNING-OF-LIFE, CYCLE 1, NO RODS 28/18 4.3-88 Rev. 31

OF-LIFE, CYCLE 1 28/18 4.3-89 Rev. 31

NCTION OF BORON CONCENTRATION AT BEGINNING-OF-LIFE, CYCLE 1, NO RODS 28/18 4.3-90 Rev. 31

DURING CYCLE 1 FOR THE CRITICAL BORON CONCENTRATION 28/18 4.3-91 Rev. 31

AND END-OF-LIFE, CYCLE 1 28/18 4.3-92 Rev. 31

END-OF-LIFE, CYCLE 1 28/18 4.3-93 Rev. 31

28/18 4.3-94 Rev. 31 ONTROL BANKS AT EOL, HZP, BANK D AND B MOVING IN THE SAME PLANE 28/18 4.3-95 Rev. 31

28/18 4.3-96 Rev. 31 INSERTION, ALL RODS OUT BUT ONE 28/18 4.3-97 Rev. 31

06/28/18 4.3-98 Rev. 31 QUADRANT TILT DIFFERENCE VERSUS TIME 28/18 4.3-99 Rev. 31

PLANT, 121 ASSEMBLIES, 12 FOOT CORE 06/28/18 4.3-100 Rev. 31

1 DESIGN BASES overall objective of the thermal and hydraulic design of the reactor core is to provide quate heat transfer compatible with the heat generation distribution in the core such that heat oval by the reactor coolant system (RCS) or the emergency core cooling system (ECCS) en applicable) assures that the following performance and safety criteria requirements are

1. Fuel damage (defined as penetration of the fission product barrier, i.e., the fuel rod clad) is not expected during normal operation and operational transients (Condition I) or any transient conditions arising from faults of moderate frequency (Condition II). It is not possible, however, to preclude a very small number of rod failures. These will be within the capability of the plant cleanup system and are consistent with the plant design bases.

2. The reactor can be brought to a safe state following a Condition III event with only a small fraction of fuel rods damaged (see above definition) although sufficient fuel damage might occur to preclude resumption of operation without considerable outage time.

3. The reactor can be brought to a safe state and the core can be kept subcritical with acceptable heat transfer geometry following transients arising from Condition IV events.

rder to satisfy the above requirements, the following design bases have been established for thermal and hydraulic design of the reactor core.

1.1 Departure from Nucleate Boiling Design Basis is re will be at least a 95 percent probability that departure from nucleate boiling (DNB) will not ur on the limiting fuel rods during normal operation and operational transients and any sient conditions arising from faults of moderate frequency (Condition I and II events), at a ercent confidence level.

this application, design limit DNBR (departure from nucleate boiling ratio) values are blished that meet the 95/95 DNB design criterion. For use in the DNB safety analysis, the t DNBR is conservatively increased to a DNBR safety analysis limit to provide DNB margin ffset the effect of rod bow and any other DNB penalties that may occur and to provide ibility in design and operation of the plant. The DNBR limits are listed in Table 4.4-1.

28/18 4.4-1 Rev. 31

preventing DNB, adequate heat transfer is assured between the fuel clad and the reactor lant, thereby preventing clad damage as a result of inadequate cooling. Maximum fuel rod ace temperature is not a design basis, as it will be within a few degrees of coolant temperature ng operation in the nucleate boiling region. Limits provided by the nuclear control and ection systems are such that this design basis will be met for transients associated with dition II events, including overpower transients. There is an additional large DNBR margin at d power operation and during normal operating transients.

DNB analyses of the core containing all RFA-2 fuel assemblies are based on the WRB-2M elation (WCAP-15025), Revised Thermal Design Procedure (RTDP) (WCAP-11397), and RE-01 modeling (WCAP-14565). The WRB-2 (WCAP-10444), ABB-NV (WCAP-14565, endum 2), and W-3 correlations are used when conditions are outside the range of the WRB-DNB correlation. Standard methods are used when conditions are outside the range of the DP.

WRB-2M DNB correlation is based entirely on rod bundle data and takes credit for the ificant improvement in the accuracy of the critical heat flux predictions over previous DNB elations. The approval of the NRC that a 95/95 limit DNBR of 1.14 is appropriate for the A-2 has been documented.

WRB-2 correlation with a 95/95 limit DNBR of 1.17 remains applicable and is conservative the RFA-2 fuel.

W-3 alternate correlation, ABB-NV, with a 95/95 limit of 1.13 is applicable to the fuel region w the first mixing vane grid for Westinghouse designed PWR fuel.

W-3 correlation with a 95/95 limit DNBR of 1.30 is used below the fuel assembly first ing vane grid. The W-3 correlation with a 95/95 limit DNBR of 1.45 is used for steam line k analysis in the pressure range of 500 to 1000 psia (WCAP-9226, Rev. 1).

h RTDP methodology (WCAP-11397), variations in plant operating parameters, nuclear and mal parameters, fuel fabrication parameters, as well as VIPRE-01, transient code, and DNB elation predictions are combined statistically to obtain the overall DNBR uncertainty factor ch is used to define the design limit DNBR that satisfies the DNB design criterion. This erion is that the probability that DNB will not occur on the most limiting fuel rod is at least 95 ent (at 95 percent confidence level) for any Condition I or II event. Conservative uncertainty es used to calculate the design limit DNBR are given in WCAP-16617. In the accident lyses using RTDP, nominal or best estimate values are used for the input parameters for which uncertainties are included in the DNBR design limit. Standard methods are used for analyses hich conditions are outside the range of RTDP. For standard methods, the parameters used are servatively treated by the direct application of parameter uncertainties to the input conditions safety analyses. The DNBR limit for standard methods is the appropriate DNB correlation t increased by sufficient margin to offset applicable DNBR penalties.

28/18 4.4-2 Rev. 31

VIPRE-01 code (WCAP-14565) is used for steady state and transient Loss of Flow/Locked or DNBR calculations as well as Locked Rotor Peak Clad Temperature (PCT) calculations.

1.2 Fuel Temperature Design Basis is ing modes of operation associated with Condition I and Condition II events, there is at least a ercent probability that the peak kW/ft fuel rods will not exceed the UO2 melting temperature e 95 percent confidence level. The melting temperature of UO2 is taken as 5080°F CAP-6065), unirradiated and decreasing 58°F per 10,000 MWD/MTU. By precluding UO2 ting, the fuel geometry is preserved and possible adverse effects of molten UO2 on the ding are eliminated. To preclude center melting and as a basis for overpower protection em setpoints, a calculated centerline fuel temperature of 4700°F has been selected as the rpower limit. This provides sufficient margin for uncertainties in the thermal evaluations as cribed in Section 4.4.2.9.1.

cussion l rod thermal evaluations are performed at rated power, maximum overpower, and during sients at various burnups. These analyses assure that this design basis, as well as the fuel grity design bases given in Section 4.2, are met. They also provide input for the evaluation of dition III and IV events described in Chapter 15.

1.3 Core Flow Design Basis is h the thimble plug assemblies removed, a minimum of 91.4 percent of the thermal flow rate pass through the fuel rod region of the core and be effective for fuel rod cooling. The DNB lyses are conservatively based on thimble plugs removed. With the thimble plug assemblies alled, a minimum of 93.4 percent of the thermal flow rate will pass through the fuel region of core and be effective for fuel rod cooling. Coolant flow through the thimble tubes, as well as leakage from the core barrel-baffle region into the core, are not considered effective for heat oval. If installed, the thimble plug assemblies limit bypass flow through the rod cluster control de thimbles in fuel assemblies which do not contain either control rods, neutron source rods or nable absorber rods. The thimble plug assemblies are described in Section 4.2.2.3.4.

cussion e cooling evaluations are based on the thermal flow rate (minimum flow) entering the reactor sel. A maximum of 8.6 percent (with the thimble plug assemblies removed) or 6.6 percent 28/18 4.4-3 Rev. 31

, baffle leakage and leakage to the vessel outlet nozzle.

1.4 Hydrodynamic Stability Design Basis is des of operation associated with Condition I and II events shall not lead to hydro-dynamic ability.

1.5 Other Considerations above design bases, together with the fuel clad and fuel assembly design bases given in tion 4.2.1, are sufficiently comprehensive so additional limits are not required.

l rod diametral gap characteristics, moderator-coolant flow velocity and distribution, and derator void are not inherently limiting. Each of these parameters is incorporated into the mal and hydraulic models used to ensure the above mentioned design criteria are met. For ance, the fuel rod diametral gap characteristics change with time (Section 4.2.3.3) and the fuel integrity is evaluated on that basis. The effect of the moderator flow velocity and distribution ction 4.4.2.2) and moderator void distribution (Section 4.4.2.4) are included in the core mal (VIPRE-01) evaluation and thus affect the design bases.

eting the fuel clad integrity criteria covers possible effects of clad temperature limitations. As d in Section 4.2.3.3, the fuel rod conditions change with time. A single clad temperature limit Condition I or Condition II events is not appropriate since, of necessity, it would be overly servative. A clad temperature limit is applied to the loss-of-coolant accident (Section 15.6.5),

trol rod ejection accident, and locked rotor accident.

2 DESCRIPTION 2.1 Summary Comparison ues of pertinent parameters, along with critical heat flux ratios, fuel temperatures, and linear t generation rates, are presented in Table 4.4-1. In power capability evaluation, there has not n any change in this design criteria. The reactor is still designed to meet the DNB design erion of Section 4.4.1.1, as well as no fuel centerline melting during normal operation, rational transients, and faults of moderate frequency.

DNB analyses were performed such that the DNBR margins are available for offsetting rod penalties, and any other DNB penalties that may exist, and for flexibility in design.

l densification has been considered in the DNB and fuel temperature evaluations utilizing the hods and models described in WCAP-8218, WCAP-10851 and WCAP-13589.

28/18 4.4-4 Rev. 31

minimum DNBRs for the rated power, design overpower, and anticipated transient conditions given in Table 4.4-1. The minimum DNBR in the limiting flow channel will be downstream of peak heat flux location (hot spot) due to the increased downstream enthalpy rise.

BRs are calculated by using the correlation and definitions described in Sections 4.4.2.2.1 and 2.2.2. The VIPRE-01 computer code (discussed in Section 4.4.4.5.1) is used to determine the distribution in the core and the local conditions in the hot channel for use in the DNB elation. The use of hot channel factors is discussed in Section 4.4.4.3.1 (nuclear hot channel ors) and in Section 4.4.2.2.4 (engineering hot channel factors).

2.2.1 Departure from Nuclear Boiling Technology WRB-2M, WRB-2, ABB-NV and W-3 Correlations are used to evaluate critical heat flux in RFA-2 fuel assemblies. All correlations are tested against measured heat flux data in order to blish a correlation limit which satisfies the DNB design basis stated in Section 4.4.1.1.

WRB-2M correlation takes advantage of the improvement in the accuracy of critical heat flux dictions over previous DNBR correlations to establish a lower correlation limit of 1.14.

WRB-2 correlation was written to take credit for the DNBR improvement due to the IFM

s. As noted previously, the WRB-2 correlation with a limit of 1.17 remains applicable and is servative for the RFA-2 fuel (Sepp, 2002).

ABB-NV correlation, which provides more accurate DNBR predictions than the W-3 elation, was used in the DNB analysis for the non-mixing vane region in the RCCA bank hdrawal from subcritical event because of the bottom peaked and axial power distribution med. The W-3 correlation continues to be used for other events such as the steamline break the feedwater malfunction events because of the low pressures involved.

2.2.2 Definition of Departure from Nuclear Boiling Ratio DNB heat flux ratio (DNBR), as applied to this design when all flow cell walls are heated, is:

q DNB, N DNBR = ---------------------

- (4.4.-1) q loc re:

q DNB, EU q DNB, N = -------------------------

- (4.4.-2)

F 28/18 4.4-5 Rev. 31

DNB correlation. For the WRB-2M correlation, the WRB-2M adjustment factor (Collins

6) is used with the Tong Factor for CHF predictions. The ABB-NV correlation is applied g the same Tong Factor as the primary DNB correlation, consistent with the limitations and ditions of WCAP-14565-P-A, Addendum 2-P-A.

the flux shape factor to account for nonuniform axial heat flux distributions (Tong 1967) with C term modified as in Tong (1972).

q"loc is the actual local heat flux.

2.2.3 Mixing Technology rate of heat exchange by mixing between flow channels is proportional to the difference in local mean fluid enthalpy of the respective channels, the local fluid density and the flow city. The proportionality is expressed by the dimensionless thermal diffusion coefficient C) which is defined as:

w* -

TDC = --------- (4.4-5) pVa re:

w* = Flow exchange rate per unit length (lbm/ft-sec) p = Fluid density (lbm /ft3)

V = Fluid velocity (ft/sec) a = Lateral flow area between channels per unit length, (ft2 /ft) application of the TDC in the VIPRE-01 analysis for determining the overall mixing effect or t exchange rate is presented in (WCAP-14565).

ious mixing tests have been performed at Columbia University (WCAP-7941). These series of s, using the R mixing vane grid design on 13-, 26-, and 32-inch grid spacing, were ducted in pressurized water loops at Reynolds numbers similar to that of a pressurized water tor core under the following single and two phase (subcooled boiling) flow conditions:

Pressure 1,500 to 2,400 psia Inlet temperature 332 to 642°F Mass velocity 1.0 to 3.5 x 106 lbm/hr-ft2 Reynolds number 1.34 to 7.45 x 105 Bulk outlet quality -52.1 to -13.5 percent 28/18 4.4-6 Rev. 31

C is plotted versus the Reynolds number. TDC is found to be independent of Reynolds ber, mass velocity, pressure, and quality over the ranges tested. The two-phase data (local, cooled boiling) fell within the scatter of the single phase data. The effect of two-phase flow on value of TDC has been demonstrated by (WCAP-7667), Rowe and Angle (1967; 1969), and zalez-Santalo et al. In the subcooled boiling region, the values of TDC were indistinguishable m the single phase values. In the quality region, Rowe and Angle show that in the case with rod cing similar to that in pressurized water reactor core geometry, the value of TDC increased h quality to a point and then decreased, but never below the single phase value. Gonzalez-talo and Griffith showed that the mixing coefficient increased as the void fraction increased.

data from these tests on the R grid showed that a design TDC value of 0.038 (for 26 inch spacing) can be used in determining the effect of coolant mixing in the VIPRE-01 analysis.

ixing test program similar to the one described above was conducted at Columbia University the current 17 by 17 geometry and mixing vane grids on 26 inch spacing (WCAP-8298). The n value of TDC obtained from these tests was 0.059 and all data were well above the current gn value of 0.038.

ce the actual reactor grid spacing is approximately 20 inches, approximately 10 inches in the region of the RFA/RFA-2 fuel, additional margin is available for this design, as the value of C increases as grid spacing decreases (WCAP-7941).

2.2.4 Hot Channel Factors total hot channel factors for heat flux and enthalpy rise are defined as the maximum-to-core rage ratios of these quantities. The heat flux hot channel factor considers the local maximum ar heat generation rate at a point (the hot spot), and the enthalpy rise hot channel factor olves the maximum integrated value along a channel (the hot channel).

h of the total hot channel factors is composed of a nuclear hot channel factor (Section 4.4.4.3) cribing the neutron power distribution and an engineering hot channel factor, which allows for ations in flow conditions and fabrication tolerances. The engineering hot channel factors are e up of subfactors which account for the influence of the variations of fuel pellet diameter, sity, enrichment, and eccentricity; fuel rod diameter pitch and bowing; inlet flow distribution; redistribution; and flow mixing.

t Flux Engineering Hot Channel Factor (FEQ) heat flux engineering hot channel factor evaluates the maximum linear heat generation rate in core. This subfactor is determined by statistically combining the fabrication variations for fuel et diameter, density, and enrichment, and has a value of 1.03 at the 95 percent probability level h 95 percent confidence. As shown in WCAP-8174 and WCAP-8296, no DNB penalty need aken for the short relatively low intensity heat flux spikes caused by variations in the above meters, as well as fuel pellet eccentricity and fuel rod diameter variation.

28/18 4.4-7 Rev. 31

effect of variations in flow conditions and fabrication tolerances on the hot channel enthalpy is directly considered in the VIPRE-01 core thermal subchannel analysis (Section 4.4.4.5.1) er any reactor operating condition. The items considered contributing to the enthalpy rise ineering hot channel factor are discussed below:

1. Pellet diameter, density, and enrichment Design values employed in the VIPRE-01 analysis related to the above fabrication variations are based on applicable limiting tolerances such that these design values are met for 95 percent of the limiting channels at a 95 percent confidence level.

Measured manufacturing data on Westinghouse 17 by 17 fuel show that the tolerances used in this evaluation are conservative. In addition, each fuel assembly is checked to ensure that the channel spacing design criteria are met. The effect of variations in pellet diameter, enrichment, and density is employed in the VIPRE-01 analysis as a direct multiplier on the hot channel enthalpy rise for analyses using standard methods. For analyses using RTDP (WCAP-11397) these variations are considered statistically when defining the DNBR limits.

2. Inlet flow maldistribution The consideration of the inlet flow maldistribution in core thermal performances is discussed in Section 4.4.4.2.2. A design basis of 5 percent reduction in coolant flow to the hot assembly is used in the VIPRE-01 analysis.

3. Flow redistribution The flow redistribution accounts for the reduction in flow in the hot channel resulting from the high flow resistance in the channel due to the local or bulk boiling. The effect of the nonuniform power distribution is inherently considered in the VIPRE-01 analysis for every operating condition which is evaluated.

4. Flow mixing The subchannel mixing model incorporated in the VIPRE-01 Code and used in reactor design is based on experimental data (WCAP-7667) discussed in Sections 4.4.2.2.3 and 4.4.4.5.1. The mixing vanes incorporated in the spacer grid design induce additional flow mixing between the various flow channels in a fuel assembly, as well as between adjacent assemblies. This mixing reduces the enthalpy rise in the hot channel resulting from local power peaking or unfavorable mechanical tolerances.

28/18 4.4-8 Rev. 31

phenomenon of fuel rod bowing as described in WCAP-8691, must be accounted for in the BR safety analysis of Condition I and Condition II events for each plant application. The hodology described in WCAP-8691 has been accepted by the NRC for use in design lications (Thomas, 1982) and is used in the analysis of fuel rod bowing.

maximum rod bow penalties accounted for in the design safety analysis are based on an mbly average burnup of 24,000 MWD/MTU. At burnups greater than 24,000 MWD/MTU, it is taken for the effect of FNH burndown due to the decrease in fissionable isotopes and the dup of fission product inventory, and no additional rod bow penalty is required (Berlinger, 6). The safety analysis for MPS-3 maintained sufficient DNBR margin, as discussed in tion 4.4.1.1, to accommodate the full and low flow DNBR penalties for RFA-2 fuel.

the upper spans of the RFA-2 fuel assembly, where additional restraint is provided with the rmediate flow mixer (IFM) grids, the grid-to-grid spacing in those spans with the IFM grids is roximately 10 inches compared to approximately 20 inches in the other spans. Using the C- approved scaling factor results in predicted channel closure in the 10 inch spans of less than percent closure. Therefore, no rod bow DNBR penalty is required in the 10 inch spans in the A-2 safety analyses.

2.2.6 Effects of Lower Plenum Flow Anomaly on DNBR ddition to the rod bow DNBR penalty discussed in Section 4.4.2.2.5, a DNBR penalty was puted to account for the lower plenum flow anomaly. Sufficient DNBR margin was retained, iscussed in Section 4.4.1.1, to offset this additional penalty.

2.2.7 High Quality Threshold on WRB-2M and WRB-2 of the WRB-2M and WRB-2 CHF correlations has been conservatively modified to utilize a alty above a certain high quality threshold within approved correlation ranges.

2.3 Linear Heat Generation Rate core average and maximum linear heat generation rates are given in Table 4.4-1. The method etermining the maximum linear heat generation rate is given in Section 4.3.2.2.

2.4 Void Fraction Distribution calculated core average and the hot subchannel maximum and average void fractions are ented in Table 4.4-2 for operation at full power with design hot channel factors. The void dels used in the VIPRE-01 Code are described in Section 4.4.2.7.3. Normalized core flow and alpy rise distributions are shown on Figures 4.4-3 through 4.4-5 for an early core design.

28/18 4.4-9 Rev. 31

embly average coolant mass velocity and enthalpy at various radial and axial core locations given on Figures 4.4-3 through 4.4-5. Typical coolant enthalpy rise and flow distributions for 4-foot elevation (1/3 of core height) are shown on Figure 4.4-3, for the 8 foot elevation (two ds of core height) on Figure 4.4-4, and at the core exit on Figure 4.4-5. The analysis for this utilized a uniform core inlet enthalpy and inlet flow distribution. No orificing is employed in reactor design.

2.6 Core Pressure Drops and Hydraulic Loads 2.6.1 Core Pressure Drops analytical model and experimental data used to calculate the pressure drops shown in le 4.4-1 are described in Section 4.4.2.7. The core pressure drop includes the fuel assembly, er core plate, and upper core plate pressure drops. The full power operation pressure drop es shown in Table 4.4-1 are the unrecoverable pressure drops across the vessel, including the t and outlet nozzles, and across the core. Uncertainties associated with the core pressure drop es are discussed in Section 4.4.2.9.2.

2.6.2 Hydraulic Loads fuel assembly hold down springs (Figure 4.2-2) keep the fuel assemblies in contact with the er core plate under all Condition I and II events with the exception of the turbine overspeed sient associated with a loss of external load. The hold down springs are designed to tolerate possibility of an over deflection associated with fuel assembly liftoff for this case and provide tact between the fuel assembly and the lower core plate following this transient. ore adverse conditions occur during a loss-of-coolant accident. These conditions are presented in tion 15.6.5.

raulic loads at normal operating conditions are calculated considering the best estimate flow accounting for the best estimate core bypass flow assuming thimble plug insertion which is e conservative than thimble plug removal for lift force calculations based on manufacturing rances. Core hydraulic loads at cold plant startup conditions are based on the cold best mate flow, but are adjusted to account for the coolant density difference. Conservative core raulic loads for a pump overspeed transient, which could possibly create flow rates 18 percent ter than the best estimate flow, are evaluated to be approximately twice the fuel assembly ght. Applicable uncertainties are applied to these results.

2.7 Correlation and Physical Data 2.7.1 Surface Heat Transfer Coefficients ced convection heat transfer coefficients are obtained from the familiar Dittus-Boelter elation (Dittus et al., 1930), with the properties evaluated at bulk fluid conditions:

28/18 4.4-10 Rev. 31

K K re:

h = Heat transfer coefficient (Btu/hr-ft2-°F)

De = Equivalent diameter (feet)

K = Thermal conductivity (But/hr-ft2 -°F)

G = Mass velocity (lb /hr-ft2)

= Dynamic viscosity (lb /ft-hr)

Cp = Heat capacity (Btu/lb -°F) s correlation has been shown to be conservative (Weisman 1959) for rod bundle geometries h pitch to diameter ratios in the range used by pressurized water reactors.

onset of nuclear boiling occurs when the clad wall temperature reaches the amount of erheat predicted by Thoms (Thom et al., 1965-1966) correlation. After this occurrence, the r clad wall temperature is determined by:

Tsat = 0.072 exp (-P/1260) (q")0.5 (4.4-7) re:

Tsat = Wall superheat, Tw - Tsat (°F) q" = Wall heat flux (Btu/hr-ft2)

P = Pressure (psia)

Tw = Outer clad wall temperature (°F)

Tsat = Saturation temperature of coolant at P (°F) 2.7.2 Total Core and Vessel Pressure Drop ecoverable pressure losses occur as a result of viscous drag (friction) and/or geometry nges (form) in the fluid flow path. The flow field is assumed to be incompressible, turbulent, le- phase water. These assumptions apply to the core and vessel pressure drop calculations for purpose of establishing the primary loop flow rate. Two-phase considerations are neglected in vessel pressure drop evaluation because the core average void is negligible (Table 4.4-2).

o-phase flow considerations in the core thermal subchannel analyses are considered and the dels are discussed in Section 4.4.4.2.3. Core and vessel pressure losses are calculated by ations of the form:

28/18 4.4-11 Rev. 31

PL D e 2 g c ( 144 )

re:

PL = Unrecoverable pressure drop (lb /in2) p = Fluid density (lb /ft3)

L = Length (feet)

De = Equivalent diameter (feet)

V = Fluid velocity (ft/sec) gc = 32.174 (lbm-ft/lbf-sec2)

K = Form loss coefficient, dimensionless F = Friction loss coefficient, dimensionless d density is assumed to be constant at the appropriate value for each component in the core vessel. Because of the complex core and vessel flow geometry, precise analytical values for form and friction loss coefficients are not available. Therefore, experimental values for these fficients are obtained from geometrically similar models.

ues are quoted in Table 4.4-1 for unrecoverable pressure loss across the reactor vessel, uding the inlet and outlet nozzles, and across the core. The results of full scale tests of core ponents and fuel assemblies were utilized in developing the core pressure loss characteristic.

pressure drop for the vessel was obtained by combining the core loss with correlation of

-seventh scale model hydraulic test data on a number of vessels (Hetsroni 1965 and AP-3269-8) and form loss relationships (Idelchik 1960). Moody (1944) curves were used to in the single-phase friction factors.

ts of the primary coolant loop flow rates were made (Section 4.4.5.1) prior to initial criticality erify that the flow rates used in the design, which were determined in part from the pressure es calculated by the method described here, are conservative.

2.7.3 Void Fraction Correlation pirical calculations are used in VIPRE-01 to model the void fraction in two-phase flow. The cooled void correlation used to model the non-equilibrium transition from single phase to leate boiling is given in WCAP-14565. The bulk (saturated) void model relates flow quality h void fraction which can account for phase slip.

28/18 4.4-12 Rev. 31

B core safety limits are generated as a function of coolant temperature, pressure, core power, axial power imbalance. Steady state operation within these safety limits ensures that the imum DNBR is not less than the safety analysis limit. The Reactor Core Safety Limit curves he COLR show the loci points of thermal power, Reactor Coolant System pressure, and rage temperature below which the calculated DNBR is no less than the design DNBR value or average enthalpy at the vessel exit is less than the enthalpy of saturated liquid. This system vides adequate protection against anticipated operational transients that are slow with respect uid transport delays in the primary system. In addition, for fast transients, e.g., uncontrolled bank withdrawal at power incident (Section 15.4.2), specific protection functions are vided as described in Section 7.2 and the use of these protection functions is described in pter 15.

2.9 Uncertainties in Estimates 2.9.1 Uncertainties in Fuel and Clad Temperatures discussed in Section 4.4.2.11, the fuel temperature is a function of crud, oxide, clad, et-clad gap, and pellet conductances. Uncertainties in the fuel temperature calculation are ntially of two types: fabrication uncertainties, such as variations in the pellet and clad ensions and the pellet density; and model uncertainties, such as variations in the pellet ductivity and the gap conductance. These uncertainties have been quantified by comparison of thermal model to the in-pile thermocouple measurements (Kjaerheim and Rolstad 1967; erheim 1969; Cohen et al., 1960; Clough and Sayers 1964; Stora et al., 1964; Devold 1968; AP-2923) by out-of-pile measurements of the fuel and clad properties (Howard and Gulvin 0; Lucks and Deem 1961; Daniel et al., 1962; Feith 1962; Vogt et al., 1964; Nishijima et al.,

5; Ainscough and Wheeler 1968; Godfrey et al., 1964; Stora et al., 1964; Bush 1965; Asamoto 8; Kruger 1968), and by measurements of the fuel and clad dimensions during fabrication.

resulting uncertainties are then used in all evaluations involving the fuel temperature. The ct of densification on fuel temperature is presented in WCAP-8218 and WCAP-10851. Other dels that affect uncertainties in fuel temperature calculations, such as the clad creep model, are ussed in WCAP-15063.

ddition to the temperature uncertainty described above, the measurement uncertainty in rmining the local power, and the effect of density and enrichment variations on the local er are considered in establishing the heat flux hot channel factor. These uncertainties are cribed in Section 4.3.2.2.1.

ctor trip set points, as specified in the Technical Specifications, include allowance for rument and measurement uncertainties, such as calorimetric error, instrument drift and nnel reproducibility, temperature measurement uncertainties, noise, and heat capacity ations.

28/18 4.4-13 Rev. 31

lant, the film temperature drop does not appreciably contribute to the uncertainty.

2.9.2 Uncertainties in Pressure Drops e and vessel pressure drops are listed in Table 4.4-1. The uncertainties are based on the ertainties in both the test results and the analytical extension of these values to the reactor lication.

ajor use of the core and vessel pressure drops is to determine the primary system coolant flow s as discussed in Section 5.1. In addition, as discussed in Section 4.4.5.1, tests on the primary em prior to initial criticality were made to verify that a conservative primary system coolant has been used in the design and analyses of the plant.

2.9.3 Uncertainties due to Inlet Flow Maldistribution effects of uncertainties in the inlet flow maldistribution criteria used in the core thermal lyses are discussed in Section 4.4.4.2.2.

2.9.4 Uncertainty in DNB Correlation uncertainty in the DNB correlation (Section 4.4.2.2) can be written as a statement on the bability of not being in DNB based on the statistics of the DNB data. This is discussed in tion 4.4.2.2.2.

2.9.5 Uncertainties of DNBR Calculations uncertainties in the DNBRs calculated by VIPRE-01 analysis (Section 4.4.4.5.1) with RTDP accounted for as discussed in Section 4.4.1.1. For those transients that do not use RTDP, the ertainties are applied directly to the VIPRE-01 parameters. The results of a sensitivity study CAP-8054) show that the minimum DNBR in the hot channel is relatively insensitive to ations in the core-wide radial power distribution (for the same value of FNH).

ability of the VIPRE-01 Code to accurately predict flow and enthalpy distributions in rod dles is discussed in Section 4.4.4.5.1 and in WCAP-14565.

2.9.6 Uncertainties in Flow Rates uncertainties associated with loop flow rates are discussed in Section 5.1. For use in core mal performance evaluations, a minimum loop flow is used which is less than the best mate loop flow. In addition, a fraction of the thermal design flow is assumed to be ineffective core heat removal capability because it bypasses the core through the various available vessel paths. With the thimble plug assemblies removed, the bypass fraction is assumed to be percent and with the thimble plug assemblies installed the bypass fraction is assumed to be percent. The flow paths considered in calculating the bypass flow fraction are described in 28/18 4.4-14 Rev. 31

2.9.7 Uncertainties in Hydraulic Loads discussed in Section 4.4.2.6.2, hydraulic loads on the fuel assembly are evaluated for a pump rspeed transient which creates flow rates 18 percent greater than the best estimate flow.

licable uncertainties are applied to these results.

2.9.8 Uncertainty in Mixing Coefficient value of the mixing coefficient, TDC, used in VIPRE-01 analyses for this application is

8. The mean value of TDC obtained in the R grid mixing tests described in tion 4.4.2.2.1 was 0.042 (for 26 inch grid spacing). The value 0.038 is one standard deviation w the mean value; approximately 90 percent of the data gives values of TDC greater than 8 (WCAP-7941-P-A).

results of the mixing tests done on 17 x 17 geometry, as discussed in Section 4.4.2.2.3, had a n value of TDC of 0.059 and standard deviation of equal to 0.007. Hence, the current design e of TDC is almost three standard deviations below the mean 26 inch grid spacing.

2.10 Flux Tilt Considerations nificant quadrant power tilts are not anticipated during normal operation, since this nomenon is caused by some asymmetric perturbation. A dropped or misaligned rod cluster trol assembly could cause changes in hot channel factors; however, these events are analyzed arately in Chapter 15.

er possible causes for quadrant power tilts include X-Y xenon transients, inlet temperature matches and enrichment variations within tolerances.

ddition to unanticipated quadrant power tilts as described above, other readily explainable mmetries may be observed during calibration of the excore detector quadrant power tilt alarm.

ing operation, incore maps are taken at least once per month and, periodically, additional s are obtained for calibration purposes. Each of these maps is reviewed for deviations from expected power distributions. Asymmetry in the core, from quadrant to quadrant, is frequently nsequence of the design when assembly and/or component shuffling and rotation uirements do not allow exact symmetry preservation. In each case, the acceptability of an erved asymmetry, planned or otherwise, depends solely on meeting the required accident lyses assumptions. In practice, once acceptability has been established by review of the incore s, the quadrant power tilt alarms and related instrumentation are adjusted to indicate zero drant Power Tilt (Quadrant Power Tilt Ratio Normalized to 1.0) as the final step in the bration process. This action ensures that the instrumentation is correctly calibrated to alarm in event an unexplained or unanticipated change occurs in the quadrant-to-quadrant relationships ween calibration intervals. Proper functioning of the quadrant power tilt alarm is significant ause no allowances are made in the design for increased hot channel factors due to unexpected eloping flux tilts since all likely causes are prevented by design or procedures or specifically 28/18 4.4-15 Rev. 31

tor.

2.11 Fuel and Cladding Temperatures sistent with the thermal-hydraulic design bases described in Section 4.4.1, the following ussion pertains mainly to fuel pellet temperature evaluation. A discussion of fuel clad grity is presented in Section 4.2.3.1.

thermal-hydraulic design assures that the maximum fuel temperature is below the melting nt of UO2 (Section 4.4.1.2). To preclude center melting and as a basis for overpower protection em set points, a calculated centerline fuel temperature of 4,700°F has been selected as the rpower limit. This provides sufficient margin for uncertainties in the thermal evaluations, as cribed in Section 4.4.2.9.1. The temperature distribution within the fuel pellet is dominantly a function of the local power density in the UO2 thermal conductivity. However, computation of radial fuel temperature distributions combines crud, oxide, clad gap, and pellet ductances. The factors which influence these conductances, such as gap size (or contact sure), internal gas pressure, gas composition, and radial power distribution within the pellet,

, have been combined into a semi empirical thermal model (Section 4.2.3.3) with the model difications for phenomena such as time dependent fuel densification given in WCAP-8218 and AP-10851 and clad creep as given in WCAP-15063. This thermal model enables the rmination of these factors and their net effects on temperature profiles. The temperature dictions have been compared to in-pile fuel temperature measurements (Kjaerheim and stad 1967; Kjaerheim 1969; Cohen et al., 1960; Clough and Sayers 1964; Stora et al., 1964; old 1968; WCAP-2923) and melt radius data (Duncan 1962; Nelson et al., 1964) with good lts.

described in WCAP-8218, WCAP-10851, WCAP-13589 and WCAP-15063, fuel rod thermal luations (fuel centerline, average, and surface temperatures) are determined throughout the rod lifetime with consideration of properties such as time dependent fuel densification and creep. To determine the maximum fuel temperatures, various burnup rods, including the hest burnup rod, are analyzed over the rod linear power range of interest.

principal factors which are employed in the determination of the fuel temperature are ussed below.

2.11.1 UO2 Thermal Conductivity thermal conductivity of uranium dioxide was evaluated from data reported by Howard et al.

60); Lucks et al. (1961); Daniel et al. (1962); Feith (1962); Vogt et al. (1964); Nishijima et al.

65); Godfrey et al. (1964); Stora et al. (1964); Bush (1965); Ainscough et al. (1968); Asamoto

l. (1968); Kruger (1968); and Gyllander (1971).

28/18 4.4-16 Rev. 31

, it has been concluded that the best estimate from the value of 2800°C KdT

° 3 watts/cm. This conclusion is based on the integral values reported by Gyllander (1971);

ns et al. (1966); Coplin et al. (1968); Duncan (1962); Bain (1962); and Stora (1970).

design curve for the thermal conductivity is shown on Figure 4.4-7. The section of the curve mperatures between 0°C and 1,300°C is in excellent agreement with the recommendation of IAEA panel (1966). The section of the curve above 1,300°C is derived for an integral value of watts/cm (Duncan 1962; Gyllander 1971; Stora 1970).

rmal conductivity for UO2 at 95 percent theoretical density can be represented best by the owing equation:

1 - 13 3 (4.4-9)

K = ------------------------------------

- + 8.775 x 10 T 11.8 + 0.0238T re:

K = watts/cm°C T = °C 2.11.2 Radial Power Distribution on UO2 Fuel Rods accurate description of the radial power distribution as a function of burnup is needed for rmining the power level for incipient fuel melting and other important performance meters, such as pellet thermal expansion, fuel swelling, and fission gas release rates. Radial er distribution in UO2 fuel rods is determined with the neutron transport theory code, SER. The LASER Code has been validated by comparing the code predictions on radial nup and isotopic distributions with measured radial microdrill data (WCAP-6069 and AP-3385-56). A radial power depression factor, f, is determined using radial power ributions predicted by LASER. The factor f enters into the determination of the pellet terline temperature, Tc, relative to the pellet surface temperature, Ts, through the expression:

Tc K ( t ) dT = q'F -------- (4.4-10)

Ts 4 28/18 4.4-17 Rev. 31

K(t) = The thermal conductivity for UO2 with a uniform density distribution q' = The linear power generation rate 2.11.3 Gap Conductance temperature drop across the pellet-clad gap is a function of the gap size and the thermal ductivity of the gas in the gap. The gap conductance model is selected such that when bined with the UO2 thermal conductivity model, the calculated fuel centerline temperatures ect the in-pile temperature measurements. A more detailed discussion of the gap conductance del is presented in WCAP-10851.

2.11.4 Surface Heat Transfer Coefficients fuel rod surface heat transfer coefficients during subcooled forced convection and nucleate ing are presented in Section 4.4.2.7.1.

2.11.5 Fuel Clad Temperatures outer surface of the fuel rod at the hot spot operates at a temperature of approximately 660°F steady state operation at rated power throughout core life due to the onset of nucleate boiling.

ially (beginning of life), this temperature is that of the clad metal outer surface.

ing operation over the life of the core, the buildup of oxides and crud on the fuel rod surface ses the clad surface temperature to increase. Allowance is made in the fuel center melt luation for this temperature rise. Since the thermal-hydraulic design basis limits DNB, quate heat transfer is provided between the fuel clad and the reactor coolant so that the core mal output is not limited by considerations of clad temperature.

2.11.6 Treatment of Peaking Factors total heat flux hot channel factor, FQ, is defined by the ratio of the maximum to core average t flux. The design value of FQ, as presented in Table 4.3-2 and discussed in Section 4.3.2.2.6,

.60 for normal operation. This results in a peak linear power of 15.15 kW/ft at full power ditions.

described in Section 4.3.2.2.6, the peak linear power resulting from overpower transients/

rator errors (assuming a maximum overpower of 121 percent) is less than 22.6 kW/ft. The terline fuel temperature must be below the UO2 melt temperature over the lifetime of the rod, uding allowances for uncertainties. The fuel temperature design basis is discussed in tion 4.4.1.2 and results in a maximum allowable calculated centerline temperature of 4,700°F.

peak linear power for prevention of centerline melt is 22.6 kW/ft. The centerline temperature e peak linear power resulting from overpower transients/operator errors (assuming a imum power of 121 percent) is below that required to produce melting.

28/18 4.4-18 Rev. 31

3.1 Plant Configuration Data nt configuration data for the thermal-hydraulic and fluid systems external to the core are vided, as appropriate, in Chapters 5, 6, and 9. Implementation of the emergency core cooling em (ECCS) is discussed in Chapter 15. Some specific areas of interest are the following:

1. Total coolant flow rates for the reactor coolant system (RCS) and each loop are provided in Table 5.1-1. Flow rates employed in the evaluation of the core are presented throughout Section 4.4.

2. Total RCS volume, including pressurizer and surge line; RCS liquid volume, including pressurizer water at steady state power conditions are given in Table 5.1-1.

3. The flow path length through each volume may be calculated from physical data provided in the above referenced tables.

4. The height of fluid in each component of the RCS may be determined from the physical data presented in Section 5.4. The components of the RCS are water filled during power operation with the pressurizer being approximately 60 percent water filled.

5. Components of the ECCS are to be located so as to meet the criteria for net positive suction head described in Section 6.3.

6. Line lengths and sizes for the safety injection system are determined so as to guarantee a total system resistance which provides, as a minimum, the fluid delivery rates assumed in the safety analyses described in Chapter 15.

7. The parameters for components of the RCS are presented in Section 5.4.

8. The steady state pressure drops and temperature distributions through the RCS are presented in Table 5.1-1.

3.2 Operating Restrictions on Pumps minimum net positive suction head (NPSH) and minimum seal injection flow rate must be blished before operating the reactor coolant pumps. With the minimum 6 gpm labyrinth seal ction flow rate established, the operator verifies that the system pressure satisfies net positive ion head requirements.

28/18 4.4-19 Rev. 31

applicable to Millstone 3.

3.4 Temperature-Power Operating Map S temperatures increase linearly with power as shown in Figure 4.4-8, for a core power of 0 MWt and a full power Tave of 589.5°F.

effects of reduced core flow, due to inoperative pumps, are discussed in Sections 5.4.1,

.6, and 15.3. Natural circulation capability of the system is shown in Table 15.2-2.

3.5 Load Following Characteristics d following using control rod motion and dilution or boration by the boron system is ussed in Section 4.3.2.4.16.

RCS is designed on the basis of steady state operation at full power heat load. The reactor lant pumps utilize constant speed drives as described in Section 5.4 and the reactor power is trolled to maintain average coolant temperature at a value which is a linear function of load, as cribed in Section 7.7.

3.6 Thermal and Hydraulic Characteristics Summary Table thermal and hydraulic characteristics are given in Tables 4.1-1 and 4.4-1.

4 EVALUATION 4.1 Critical Heat Flux critical heat flux correlations utilized in the core thermal analysis are explained in detail in tion 4.4.2.2.

4.2 Core Hydraulics 4.2.1 Flow Paths Considered in Core Pressure Drop and Thermal Design following flow paths for core bypass flow are considered:

1. Flow through the spray nozzles into the upper head for head cooling purposes

2. Flow entering into the rod cluster control guide thimbles to cool the control rods

3. Leakage flow from the vessel inlet nozzle directly to the vessel outlet nozzle through the gap between the vessel and the barrel 28/18 4.4-20 Rev. 31

5. Flow in the gaps between the fuel assemblies on the core periphery and the adjacent baffle wall above contributions are evaluated to confirm that the design value of the core bypass flow is

. The design value of core bypass flow for the Millstone 3 plant is equal to 8.6 percent of the l vessel flow with the thimble plug assemblies removed and 6.6 percent with the thimble plug mblies inserted.

he total allowance, 4.1 percent (with thimble plug assemblies removed) or 2.1 percent (with thimble plug assemblies inserted) is associated with the core (item 2 above). The remainder of core bypass flow is associated with the reactor vessel internals (items 1, 3, 4 and 5 above).

culations have been performed using drawing tolerances in the worst direction and accounting uncertainties in pressure losses. Based on these calculations, the core bypass is no greater than design values quoted above.

w model test results for the flow path through the reactor are discussed in Section 4.4.2.7.2.

4.2.2 Inlet Flow Distributions a have been considered from several 1/7-scale hydraulic reactor model tests (WCAP-3269-8; sroni and in sensitivity studies (WCAP-8054)) in arriving at the core inlet flow distribution criteria to be used in the VIPRE-01 analyses (Section 4.4.4.5.1). The design basis percent reduction to the hot assembly inlet is used in VIPRE-01 analyses.

experimental error estimated in the inlet velocity distribution has been considered, as outlined CAP-8054, where the sensitivity of changes in inlet velocity distributions to hot channel mal performance is shown to be small.

effect of the total flow rate on the inlet velocity distribution was studied in the experiments of AP-3269-8. As was expected, on the basis of the theoretical analysis, no significant variation ld be found in inlet velocity distribution with reduced flow rate.

4.2.3 Empirical Friction Factor Correlations o empirical friction factor correlations are used in the VIPRE-01 Code (Section 4.4.4.5.1).

friction factor in the axial direction, parallel to the fuel rod axis, is evaluated using the elations derived on WCAP-14565.

flow in the lateral directions, normal to the fuel rod axis, views the reactor core as a large tube

k. Thus, the lateral friction factor proposed by Idelchik (1960) is applicable. This correlation f the form:

28/18 4.4-21 Rev. 31

re:

A = A function of the rod pitch and diameter as given in Idelchik (1960)

ReL = The lateral Reynolds number based on the rod diameter 4.3 Influence of Power Distribution core power distribution, which is largely established at beginning of life by fuel enrichment, ing pattern, and core power level is also a function of variables, such as control rod worth and ition, and fuel depletion throughout lifetime. Radial power distributions in various planes of core are often illustrated for general interest, however, the core radial enthalpy rise ribution as determined by the integral of power up each channel is of greater importance for B analyses. These radial power distributions, characterized by FNH (Section 4.3.2.2.1) as l as axial heat flux profiles, are discussed in the following two sections.

4.3.1 Nuclear Enthalpy Rise Hot Channel Factor, FNH en the local power density q' (kW/ft) at a point x, y, z in a core with N fuel rods and height H:

H Max q'X o y o ,z o )dz N hot rod power o F H = -------------------------------------------- = ---------------------------------------------------------

- (4.4-14) average rod power 1- H N q' ( x, y, z ) dz all o rods way in which FNH is used in the DNB calculation is important. The location of minimum BR depends on the axial profile and the value of DNBR depends on the enthalpy rise to that nt. Basically, the maximum value of the rod integral is used to identify the most likely rod for BR. An axial power profile is obtained which, when normalized to the design value of FNH, eates the axial heat flux along the limiting rod. The surrounding rods are assumed to have the e axial profile with rod average powers, which are typical distributions found in hot mblies. In this manner, worst case axial profiles can be combined with worst case radial ributions for reference DNB calculations.

ould be noted again that FNH is an integral and is used as such in DNB calculations. Local t fluxes are obtained by using hot channel and adjacent channel explicit power shapes, which into account variations in horizontal power shapes throughout the core.

28/18 4.4-22 Rev. 31

le 4.4-1 (Radial Power Distribution Parameters). The value of FRTPH, which is the limit of H at Rated Thermal Power (RTP), is specified in the COLR.

permitted relaxation of FNH is included in the DNB protection set points and allows radial er shape changes with rod insertion to the insertion limits (WCAP-7912), thus allowing ter flexibility in the nuclear design.

4.3.2 Axial Heat Flux Distributions discussed in Section 4.3.2.2, the axial heat flux distribution can vary as a result of rod motion, er change, or due to spatial xenon transients which may occur in the axial direction.

sequently, it is necessary to measure the axial power imbalance by means of the excore lear detectors (Section 4.3.2.2.7) and protect the core from excessive axial power imbalance.

reference axial shape used in establishing core DNB limits (that is, Overtemperature T ection system set points) is a chopped cosine with a peak to average value of 1.78. The reactor system provides automatic reduction of the trip set points on excessive axial power alance. To determine the magnitude of the set point reduction, the reference shape is plemented by other axial shapes skewed to the bottom and top of the core.

course of those accidents in which DNB is a concern is analyzed in Chapter 15, assuming that protection set points have been set on the basis of these shapes. In many cases, the axial power ribution in the hot channel changes throughout the course of the accident, due to rod motion, lant temperature, and power level changes.

initial conditions for the accidents for which DNB protection is required are assumed to be e permissible within the specified axial offset control limits described in Section 4.3.2.2.6. In case of the loss-of-flow accident, the hot channel heat flux profile is very similar to the power sity profile in normal operation preceding the accident.

4.4 Core Thermal Response eneral summary of the steady state thermal-hydraulic design parameters, including thermal put, flow rates, etc., is provided in Table 4.4-1.

stated in Section 4.4.1, the design bases of the application are to prevent DNB and to prevent melting for Condition I and II events. he protective systems described in Chapter 7 are gned to meet these bases. he response of the core to Condition II transients is given in pter 15.

28/18 4.4-23 Rev. 31

4.5.1 Core Analysis objective of reactor core thermal design is to determine the maximum heat removal capability ll flow subchannels and to show that the core safety limits are not exceeded using the most servative power distribution. The thermal design takes into account local variations in ensions, power generation, flow redistribution, and mixing. VIPRE-01 is a three-dimensional channel code that has been developed to account for hydraulic and nuclear effects on the alpy rise in the core and hot channels (WCAP-14565). VIPRE-01 modeling of a PWR core is ed on a one-pass modeling approach, wherein hot channels and their adjacent channels are deled in detail, while the rest of the core is modeled simultaneously on a relatively coarse mesh CAP-14565). The behavior of the hot assembly is determined by superimposing the power ribution upon the inlet flow distribution, while allowing for flow mixing and flow distribution ween flow channels. Local variations in fuel rod power, fuel rod and pellet fabrication, and ulent mixing are also considered in determining conditions in the hot channels. Conservation ations of mass, axial and lateral momentum, and energy are solved for the fluid enthalpy, axial rate, lateral flow, and pressure drop.

behavior of the hot assembly is determined by superimposing the power distribution among assemblies upon the inlet flow distribution while allowing for flow mixing and flow ribution between assemblies. The boundary flow and enthalpy distributions for the hottest mbly are obtained from the core-wide, assembly-by-assembly analysis. The local variations ower, fuel rod and pellet fabrication, and mixing within the hottest assembly are combined h the boundary conditions of the hottest assembly, in order to determine the conditions in the channel.

4.5.2 Steady State Analysis VIPRE-01 computer program, as approved by the NRC, in WCAP-14565, is used to rmine coolant density, mass velocity, enthalpy, vapor void, static pressure, and DNBR ributions along parallel flow channels within a reactor core under all expected operating ditions. The VIPRE-01 code is described in detail in WCAP-14565, including models and elations used.

mates of uncertainties are discussed in Section 4.4.2.9.

4.5.3 Experimental Verification ensive experimental verification of VIPRE-01 is presented in WCAP-14565 and Stewart 89).

VIPRE-01 analysis is based on a knowledge and understanding of the heat transfer and rodynamic behavior of the coolant flow and the mechanical characteristics of the fuel ments. The use of the VIPRE-01 analysis provides a realistic evaluation of the core ormance and is used in the thermal analyses described above.

28/18 4.4-24 Rev. 31

approved VIPRE-01 methodology, WCAP-14565, was shown to be conservative for transient mal hydraulic analysis.

4.6 Hydrodynamic and Flow Power Coupled Instability ling flow may be susceptible to thermohydrodynamic instabilities (Boure et al., 1973). These abilities are undesirable in reactors since they may cause a change in thermohydraulic ditions that may lead to a reduction in the DNB heat flux relative to that observed during a dy flow condition or to undesired forced vibrations of core components. Therefore, a mohydraulic design criterion was developed which states that modes of operation under dition I and II events shall not lead to thermohydrodynamic instabilities.

o specific types of flow instabilities are considered for Westinghouse PWR operation. These the Ledinegg or flow excursion type of static instability and the density wave type of dynamic ability.

edinegg instability involves a sudden change in flow rate from one steady state to another.

s instability occurs (Boure et al., 1973) when the slope of the reactor coolant system pressure p-flow rate curve (P ÷ Ginternal) becomes algebraically smaller than the loop supply (pump d) pressure drop-flow rate curve (P ÷ Gexternal). The criterion for stability is thus P ÷ Ginternal) > (P ÷ Gexternal).

Westinghouse pump head curve has a negative slope (P ÷ Gexternal) < 0 whereas the tor coolant system pressure drop-flow curve has a positive slope (P ÷ Ginternal) > 0 over Condition I and Condition II operational ranges. Thus, the Ledinegg instability will not occur.

mechanism of density wave oscillations in a heated channel has been described by Lahey and ody (1977). Briefly, an inlet flow fluctuation produces an enthalpy perturbation. This perturbs length and the pressure drop of the single phase region and causes quality or void urbations in the two-phase regions which travel up the channel with the flow. The quality and th perturbations in the two-phase region create two-phase pressure drop perturbations.

wever, since the total pressure drop across the core is maintained by the characteristics of the d system external to the core, then the two-phase pressure drop perturbation feeds back to the le- phase region. These resulting perturbations can be either attenuated or self-sustained.

mple method has been developed by Ishii (Saha et al., 1976) for parallel closed channel ems to evaluate whether a given condition is stable with respect to the density wave type of amic instability. This method had been used to assess the stability of typical Westinghouse tor designs under Condition I and II operation. The results indicate that a large margin to sity wave instability exists, e.g., increases on the order of 150 to 200 percent of rated reactor er would be required for the predicted inception of this type of instability.

28/18 4.4-25 Rev. 31

e is little resistance to lateral flow leaving the flow channels of high power density. There is energy transfer from channels of high power density to lower power density channels. This pling with cooler channels has led to the opinion that an open channel configuration is more le than the above closed channel analysis under the same boundary conditions. Flow stability s (Kakac et al., 1974) have been conducted where the closed channel systems were shown to ess stable than when the same channels were cross connected at several locations. The cross nections were such that the resistance to channel cross flow and enthalpy perturbations would reater than that which would exist in PWR core which has a relatively low resistance to cross w instabilities which have been observed have occurred almost exclusively in closed channel ems operating at low pressures relative to the Westinghouse PWR operating pressures. Kao, rgan, and Parker (1973) analyzed parallel closed channel stability experiments simulating a tor core flow. These experiments were conducted at pressures up to 2200 psia. The results wed that for flow and power levels typical of power reactor conditions, no flow oscillations ld be induced above 1200 psia.

itional evidence that flow instabilities do not adversely affect thermal margin is provided by data from the rod bundle DNB tests. Many Westinghouse rod bundles have been tested over e ranges of operating conditions with no evidence of premature DNB or of inconsistent data ch might be indicative of flow instabilities in the rod bundle.

ummary, it is concluded that thermohydrodynamic instabilities will not occur under Condition d II modes of operation for Westinghouse PWR reactor designs. A large power margin, ter than doubling rated power, exists to predicted inception of such instabilities. Analysis has n performed which shows that minor plant to plant differences in Westinghouse reactor gns, such as fuel assembly arrays, core power flow ratios, fuel assembly length, etc., will not lt in gross deterioration of the above power margins.

4.7 Fuel Rod Behavior Effects from Coolant Flow Blockage lant flow blockages can occur within the coolant channels of a fuel assembly or external to reactor core. The effects of fuel assembly blockage within the assembly on fuel rod behavior more pronounced than external blockages of the same magnitude. In both cases, the flow kages cause local reductions in coolant flow. The amount of local flow reduction, where it urs in the reactor, and how far along the flow stream the reduction persists, are considerations ch will influence the fuel rod behavior. The effects of coolant flow blockages, in terms of ntaining rated core performance, are determined both by analytical and experimental methods.

experimental data are usually used to augment analytical tools such as computer programs ilar to VIPRE-01. Inspection of the DNB correlation (Section 4.4.2.2 and Tong 1967) shows the predicted DNBR is dependent upon the local values of quality and mass velocity.

thermal hydraulic codes are capable of predicting the effects of local flow blockages on BR within the fuel assembly on a subchannel basis, regardless of where the flow blockage 28/18 4.4-26 Rev. 31

urately predicted. Full recovery of the flow was found to occur about 30 inches downstream of blockage. With the reactor operating at the nominal full power conditions specified in le 4.4-1, the effects of an increase in enthalpy and decrease in mass velocity in the lower ion of the fuel assembly would not result in the reactor reaching a minimum DNBR below the ty analysis limit.

m a review of the open literature, it is concluded that flow blockage in open lattice cores ilar to the Westinghouse cores causes flow perturbations which are local to the blockage. For ance, Ohtsubo et al. (1972) show that the mean bundle velocity is approached asymptotically ut 4 inches downstream from a flow blockage in a single flow cell. Similar results were also nd for two and three cells completely blocked. Basmer et al. (1972) tested an open lattice fuel mbly in which 41 percent of the subchannels were completely blocked in the center of the test dle between spacer grids. Their results show that the stagnant zone behind the flow blockage ntially disappears after 1.65 L/De or about 5 inches for their test bundle. They also found that age flow through the blockage tended to shorten the stagnant zone or, in essence, the plete recovery length. Thus, local flow blockages within a fuel assembly have little effect on channel enthalpy rise. The reduction in local mass velocity is then the main parameter which cts the DNBR. If the plants were operating at full power and nominal steady state conditions, pecified in Table 4.4-1, a reduction in local mass velocity of approximately 50 percent would equired to reduce the DNBR from the nominal value to the safety analysis limit. The above s velocity effect on the DNBR correlation was based on the assumption of fully developed along the full channel length.

eality, a local flow blockage is expected to promote turbulence and thus would likely not affect BR at all.

lant flow blockages induce local cross flows, as well as promote turbulence. Fuel rod avior is changed under the influence of a sufficiently high cross flow component. Fuel rod ation could occur, caused by this cross flow component, through vortex shedding or turbulent hanisms. If the cross flow velocity exceeds the limit established for fluid elastic stability, e amplitude whirling results. The limits for a controlled vibration mechanism are established m studies of vortex shedding and turbulent pressure fluctuations. The cross flow velocity uired to exceed fluid elastic stability limits is dependent on the axial location of the blockage the characterization of the cross flow (jet flow or not). These limits are greater than those for atory fuel rod wear. Cross flow velocity above the established limits can lead to mechanical r of the fuel rods at the grid support locations. Fuel rod wear due to flow induced vibration is sidered in the fuel rod fretting evaluation (Section 4.2).

5 TESTING AND VERIFICATION 5.1 Test Prior to Initial Criticality eactor coolant flow test is performed following fuel loading, but prior to initial criticality.

lant loop pressure drop data are obtained in this test. These data, in conjunction with coolant 28/18 4.4-27 Rev. 31

core thermal and hydraulic analysis.

5.2 Initial Power and Plant Operation e power distribution measurements are made at several core power levels (Chapter 14). These s are used to implicitly confirm the validity of the core design inputs in the safety analysis.

5.3 Component and Fuel Inspections ections performed on the manufactured fuel are described in Section 4.2.4. Fabrication surements critical to thermal and hydraulic analysis are obtained to verify that the engineering channel factors in the design analyses (Section 4.4.2.2.4) are met.

6 INSTRUMENTATION REQUIREMENTS 6.1 Incore Instrumentation rumentation is located in the core so that by correlating movable neutron detector information h fixed thermocouple information, radial, axial, and azimuthal core characteristics may be ined for all core quadrants.

incore instrumentation system is comprised of thermocouples, which are positioned to sure fuel assembly coolant outlet temperatures at preselected positions and fission chamber ctors positioned in guide thimbles which run the length of selected fuel assemblies to measure neutron flux distribution. Figure 4.4-10 shows the number and location of instrumented mblies in the core. The core-exit thermocouples provide a backup to the flux monitoring rumentation for monitoring power distribution. The routine, systematic, collection of mocouple readings provides a data base. From this data base, abnormally high or abnormally readings, quadrant temperature tilts, or systematic departures from a prior reference map can educed.

movable incore neutron detector system would be used for more detailed mapping if the mocouple system were to indicate an abnormality. These two complimentary systems are e useful when taken together than either system alone would be. The incore instrumentation em is described in more detail inSection 7.7.1.9.

incore instrumentation is provided to obtain data from which fission power density ribution in the core, coolant enthalpy distribution in the core, and fuel burnup distribution may etermined.

6.2 Overtemperature and Overpower T Instrumentation Overtemperature T trip protects the core against low DNBR. The Overpower T trip ects against excessive power (fuel rod rating protection).

28/18 4.4-28 Rev. 31

rpower T trip set points include the reactor coolant temperature in each loop and the axial ribution of core power through the use of the two section excore neutron detectors.

6.3 Instrumentation to Limit Maximum Power Output output of the three ranges (source, intermediate, and power) of detectors, with the electronics he nuclear instruments, is used to limit the maximum power output of the reactor within their ective ranges.

re are six radial locations containing a total of eight neutron flux detectors installed around the tor in the primary shield. Two proportional counters for the source range are installed on osite flat portions of the core containing the primary startup sources at an elevation roximately one-quarter of the core height. Two compensated ionization chambers for the rmediate range, located in the same instrument wells and detector assemblies as the source ge detectors, are positioned at an elevation corresponding to one-half of the core height. Four l section uncompensated ionization chamber assemblies for the power range are installed ically in wells located within the reactor neutron shield tank and adjacent to the wall closest to reactor vessel to minimize neutron flux pattern distortions. These wells are located at the four ners of the core and equidistant from the reactor vessel at all points. Each power range detector vides two signals corresponding to the neutron flux in the upper and in the lower sections of a quadrant. The three ranges of detectors are used as inputs to monitor neutron flux from a pletely shutdown condition to 120 percent of full power with the capability of recording rpower excursions up to 200 percent of full power.

output of the power range channels is used for:

1. The rod speed control function

2. Alerting the operator to an excessive power imbalance between the quadrants

3. Protecting the core against the consequences of rod ejection accidents

4. Protecting the core against the consequences of adverse power distributions resulting from dropped rods.

ails of the neutron detectors and nuclear instrumentation design and the control and trip logic given in Chapter 7. The limits on neutron flux operation and trip set points are given in the hnical Specifications.

6.4 Loose Parts Monitoring System Loose Parts Monitoring System (LPMS) is a system provided for the detection of loose allic parts in the primary system during power operation modes. The LPMS, together with the ciated programmatic and reporting procedures, comprise the Millstone 3 Loose Part ection Program described in Regulatory Guide 1.133, Revision 1.

28/18 4.4-29 Rev. 31

Regulatory Guide Position Discussion C.1.a, C.1.b, and C.4.a A total of twelve loose parts sensors are provided to detect loose parts impacts with a kinetic energy of 0.5 ft-lb of parts weighing between 0.25 pounds and 30 pounds in the vicinity of six natural collection areas

1. Two sensors are located under the reactor vessel.

Each sensor is stud-mounted to a clamp which is clamped to a thimble guide tube.

2. Two sensors are located on the reactor vessel head.

Each is stud-mounted to a reactor vessel head lifting lug.

1. Two sensors are located under the reactor vessel.

Each sensor is stud-mounted to a clamp which is clamped to a thimble guide tube.

2. Two sensors are located on the reactor vessel head.

Each is stud mounted to a reactor vessel head lifting lug.

3. Two sensors are stud-mounted on each steam genera-tor. Both sensors are located approximately in the same vertical plane equal distant above and below the steam generator tubesheet centerline.

C.1.c Two independent sensors are provided at each natural collection region. Each of these channels is physically separated from each other at the sensors up to and including the charge preamplifiers. The output of the preamplifiers is routed by individual shielded cables through seismically qualified conduit and cable trays and a penetration transition box to a containment penetration.

C.1.d and C.1.e The data acquisition system of the LPMS continuously compares the active channels outputs with predetermined alarm setpoints and software algorithm and alerts the control room operators via an audible alarm when a potential loose part condition exists. All 12 channels outputs are digitally recorded upon receiving an alarm condition for analysis.

C.1.f The LPMS has the capability for periodic on-line channel checks and channel functional tests in addition to on-line and off-line channel calibration.

28/18 4.4-30 Rev. 31

C.1.g See Table 1.8-1.

C.1.h The LPMS will be included in the Millstone surveillance and maintenance program. Any components that are not qualified for 40 years will be replaced prior to the end of their service life. Maintenance actions will be performed in accordance with approved procedures. The documented maintenance history results will be maintained and evaluated over the life of the plant.

C.1.i Recognition of a faulty channel is easily identified with a CPU Trouble condition alarm. All instrument rack room electronics are rack-mounted, designed for the ease of replacement or repair in the event of a malfunctioning channel.

C.2 and C.4.e The Alert Level setpoints were determined by simulating impact at locations with impact energies specified by the Regulatory Guide 1.133. These simulated impacts were compared to background amplitudes at various plant conditions to determine if the alarm circuitry can distinguish between the two levels. This is used to determine an alarm setpoint which will give an indication of an impact but will not cause excessive false alarms due to background noise.

C.3, C.4.b, and C.4.e The procedures for performing channel check, channel functional test, and background noise measurements are available at the Millstone station. In the event an alert level is exceeded or if the weekly audio monitoring or quarterly measurements indicate the presence or possibility of a loose part, diagnostic steps will be taken within 72 hours8.333333e-4 days <br />0.02 hours <br />1.190476e-4 weeks <br />2.7396e-5 months <br /> to determine whether a loose part is present and its safety significance.

C.4.c Anticipated major sources of external and internal noises are pump starts, reactor trips, and control rod stepping. The alarm is automatically bypassed during rod stepping.

C.4.d Meeting the Regulatory Guide 1.133 criteria in position C.3, the acquisition of data is assured.

C.4.f Operability and surveillance requirements for the LPMS are included in the Technical Specifications.

C.4.g Millstone procedures provide a diagnostic program using information from other plant systems and operating history to confirm the presence of a loose part.

28/18 4.4-31 Rev. 31

C.4.i Radiation protection procedures have been developed to provide guidance and direction to station personnel for minimizing radiation exposure during maintenance, calibration, and diagnostics activities and are available at the Millstone station.

C.4.j Millstones non-licensed training program provides pertinent training for plant personnel involved with the system operation and maintenance. Loose part diagnosis is performed by an organization qualified to interpret loose part data.

C.4.k The equipment inside containment has been demonstrated to be functional following an OBE.

C.6 If the presence of a loose part is confirmed and is evaluated to have safety significance, it will be reported to the NRC in accordance with 10 CFR 50.72.

6.5 Instrumentation for Detection of Inadequate Core Cooling ICC Monitoring System integrates the processing and display of:

1. Subcooled/Superheat Monitor,

2. Core Exit Thermocouples, and

3. Reactor Vessel Level Monitoring (Heated Junction Thermocouple) (HJTC).

information provided by this system allows the plant operators to monitor the reactor status ng abnormal plant conditions. The operator uses this information to take corrective action as ded and/or confirm that actions taken produce the desired result. Thus, the approach to, tence of, and recovery from inadequate core cooling conditions can be monitored consistent h the requirements of NUREG 0737,Section II.F.2. The Millstone 3 ICC System is designed ategory 1 (Class IE) with redundant trains (Train A and Train B). Each train contains stand e processing electronics and displays, which monitors, alarms, and trends ICC, as shown in ure 4.4-11.

cooled/superheat monitors use RCS temperatures and pressures to calculate the degree of cooling or superheat in the reactor coolant either in terms of temperature or pressure. The ulation is based upon the most conservative input temperature and pressures.

e exit thermocouples (CET) are provided with required cold junction temperature pensation. All core exit temperatures are displayed on a digital panel meter, selectable from a tch panel.

28/18 4.4-32 Rev. 31

tem Purpose pical small break LOCA illustrates the progression of an event which causes the approach to dequate Core Cooling. Figure 4.4-12 shows a representative behavior of reactor coolant level, tor coolant system pressure, and core exit temperature vs. time after break. During the gression of the event, a variety of monitoring instruments must be available to properly inform operator of the status of the nuclear system at any given time. C-E has determined that equate core cooling monitoring requirements can be met by appropriately measuring the laying margin to saturation, reactor vessel water level above the core, and reactor core exit peratures. In order to accomplish these functions, ICC utilizes three instruments: (1) the cooled Margin Monitor to measure saturation/superheat margin, (2) the Heated Junction rmocouple (HJTC) System to monitor level/temperature in the region of the upper portion of reactor vessel, and (3) Core Exit Thermocouples to measure the temperature of the reactor lant as it leaves the reactor core.

the function of the HJTC System to monitor reactor coolant inventory during saturation ditions. The reactor coolant system is at saturation conditions until sufficient coolant is lost to over the top of the active core. During this interval, instrumentation to measure coolant entory loss has not previously been available. The HJTC System provides measurement of the apsed liquid level above the upper core alignment plate.

ing these types of events the reactor coolant exists in a saturated two-phase mixture of liquid voids. The HJTC System is designed with a shield to separate the voids from the liquid to e a more accurate indication of water inventory, defined as collapsed water level. The apsed water level is obtained in all operating and accident conditions as indicated in ure 4.4-12, including the recovery period when the reactor coolant has risen above the fuel nment plate. Therefore, the HJTC System is designed to survive the high steam temperatures urring during the preceding uncovery of the core.

level range extends from the top of the vessel down to just above the upper core alignment

e. Based on a generic study done for Westinghouse plants, the response time is short enough to k the level during small break LOCA events. The resolution is sufficient to show the initial l drop, the key locations near the hot leg elevation, and the lowest levels just above the upper alignment plate. This provides the operator with information to track the event and to detect consequences of his mitigating actions or the functionality of automatic equipment.

Heated Junction Thermocouple System (HJTCSP) is a reactor vessel measuring system that ts the NRC recommendations and requirements outlined in NUREG-0578. The HJTCSP nitors coolant inventory in the vessel region above the core. Redundant strings of heated tion thermocouples are arranged in the reactor vessel head area to provide indication of ditions at eight distinct levels. The system is a two-channel system, each consisting of a string ight sensors.

28/18 4.4-33 Rev. 31

tem Description overall system functional configuration is shown in Figure 4.4-13. As indicated in the figure, system consists of two independent safety channels. Each channel consists of one probe mbly, signal processing equipment, and an operator interface. Probe assemblies are located in upper core support structure of the reactor vessel. Signal processing equipment and operator rfaces are located outside of containment.

Probe Assemblies HJTC System measures reactor coolant liquid inventory with discrete HJTC sensors located ifferent levels within a separator tube running from the top of the core to the reactor vessel

d. The basic principle of system operation is the detection of a temperature difference between cent heated and unheated thermocouples.

pictured in Figures 4.4-14 and 4.4-15, the HJTC sensor consists of a Chromel-Alumel mocouple near a heater (or heated junction) and another Chromel-Alumel thermocouple itioned away from the heater (or unheated junction). In a fluid with relatively good heat sfer properties, the temperature difference between the adjacent thermocouples is very small.

fluid with relatively poor heat transfer properties, the temperature difference between the mocouples is large.

o design features are provided to improve operation of the HJTC System. First, each HJTC is lded to avoid overcooling due to direct water contact during two-phase liquid conditions. The C with the splash shield is referred to as the HJTC sensor (see Figure 4.4-15). Second, a ng of HJTC sensors is enclosed in a tube that separates the liquid and gas phases that surround separator tube creates a collapsed liquid level that the HJTC sensors measure. The collapsed id level can be related to the average liquid fraction of the fluid in the reactor head volume ve the fuel alignment plate. This mode of direct in-vessel sensing reduces spurious effects due ressure, fluid properties, and non homogeneities of the fluid medium. The string of HJTC sors and the separator tube are referred to as the HJTC probe assembly.

Signal Processing heated and unheated thermocouples in the HJTC are connected in such a way that absolute differential temperature signals are available. This is shown in Figure 4.4-16. When water ounds the thermocouples, their temperature and voltage outputs are approximately equal.

-C) on Figure 4.4-16 is, therefore, approximately zero. In the absence of liquid, the mocouple temperature and output voltages become unequal, causing V(A-C) to rise.

28/18 4.4-34 Rev. 31

Provides indication of the collapsed liquid level above the upper core alignment plate.

Provides a level output signal.

Provides temperature indications of coolant in the upper plenum.

Provides test features for performing HJTCS operability and diagnostics.

Provides on-line surveillance of HJTCS to assess operability.

Provides control of heater voltage to minimize HJTC internal heating after uncovery.

Operator Interface HJTCS operator interface, located in each of the ICC cabinets, consists of an output indicator, alarms output to the plant annunciator system. The level indication consists of a panel insert a digital panel meter that is capable of displaying the percent level of the steam-water interface ve the fuel alignment plate as indicated by the HJTC Probe assembly. The plant annunciator em alerts the operator that reactor vessel water level has decreased below a preset level when vated by HJTCS contact outputs.

Hardware Design iagram showing the HJTCS hardware configuration for a single channel is provided in ure 4.4-17. The hardware consists of the following major components: (a) sensing equipment, signal processing equipment, (c) heater power controllers, and (d) indicators.

Sensing Equipment HJTC System is composed of two channels of HJTC instruments. Each HJTC instrument nnel is manufactured into a probe assembly consisting of eight (8) HJTC sensors, a seal plug, electrical connectors (Figure 4.4-18). The eight (8) HJTC sensors are physically independent located at eight levels from the reactor vessel head to the fuel alignment plate.

probe assembly is housed in a stainless steel structure that protects the sensors from flow s and serves as the guide path for the sensors. Figure 4.4-19 describes the locations of the C probe assemblies.

Signal Processing Equipment nal processing is performed by a microprocessor system. The system also controls heater er and performs on-line surveillance to determine thermocouple opens and heater operability.

signal processor receives millivolt inputs from each of the eight (8) HJTCs. The device then 28/18 4.4-35 Rev. 31

em, (d) a signal to the heater controllers to modulate heater voltage after uncovery, and (e) al to the subcooled margin calculator.

Heater Power Controllers ach channel, a heater controller supplies power to the HJTC heaters. The heater controller is ded into two separate power supplies, each serving four (4) probe sensors.

Indicators outputs of the signal processor are sent to the Safety Parameter Display System (SPDS),

ch is a subset of the plant computer system. This information can be viewed on one of the trol room or board mounted plant computer monitors. The control room or board mounted puter monitors will display percent level (head/plenum), provide for alarm indication, and n operator request, can display the temperatures of each individual unheated thermocouple.

C Probe Holder Support Tube probe holder support tubes provide the guidance and support for the HJTC probe assemblies.

y are located in two (2) guide path shrouds.

guide path shrouds are located in spare control rod drive mechanism (CRDM) Penetrations nd 26. The probe holder support tubes are attached to the interior of the guide path shroud cture that is conceptually identical to an existing Rod Cluster Control Guide Tube. The two Probe Holder Assemblies (see Figure 4.4-19) consisting of the Guide Path Shroud and the be holder are installed in the Upper Core Support Structure. This was accomplished by first oving a cover plate from the Upper Core Support Plate. The installed Probe Holder Assembly eld in place utilizing the bolting and locking arrangement employed in the original design of Upper Core Support Structure. The Probe Holder Assembly in essence simply replaces the Cluster Control Guide Tube and Rod Cluster Control Drive Shaft.

Probe Holder Assemblies have been judiciously located remote from the outlet nozzles to uce normal and postulated accident loadings on the Probe Holder. The Probe Holder is defined n Internal Structure in accordance with ASME Boiler and Pressure Code Subsection NG uirements and is fabricated to adhere to these requirements.

ctor Pressure Boundary Modifications dification of the reactor vessel head pressure boundary at two spare CRDM locations was uired to form a penetration for each of the two HJTC probe assemblies. At the two locations cted for the HJTC probe assemblies, the pressure housing was cut and a section removed and aced with new components containing a quick disconnect type flange and extension tube (see ure 4.4-20). Provisions are made in the assembly to capture the probe within the flange and ct a pressure tight seal.

28/18 4.4-36 Rev. 31

ctor Vessel Head Seismic Support Platform which provides ease of accessibility.

C Handling Canister Design HJTC probe handling hardware configuration is shown on Figure 4.4-21. The Grayloc flange isassembled and a protective bullet nose assembly is screwed onto the HJTC probe seal plug.

hub adapter is lowered over the bullet nose onto the Grayloc seal ring and secured (hand t) using the Grayloc clamp assembly. The handling canister is then positioned over the bullet e assembly and a cable is attached to the bullet nose assembly. The handling canister is then ered over the bullet nose assembly with the weight of the handling canister supported by the rhead crane. The cable assembly supporting the HJTC Probe is then tied off to a lanyard ched to the canister. The winch at the base of the canister is removed with quick disconnect

. The handling canister assembly, with the HJTC probe inside, is then removed to the storage using the overhead crane. The operation is then repeated for the other HJTC probe location h a second handling canister. After the reactor vessel head has been reinstalled, the above cedure is reversed to reinsert the HJTC probes. Some of the specific features for the design of handling hardware are as follows:

The bottom zone of the canister contains sealed attenuating material such that exposure to personnel from the HJTC probe will be kept reasonably low. Estimated radiation levels are provided in Table 4.4-3.

The attenuating material is encapsulated in stainless steel.

A winch, attached to the base of the canister with quick release pins, is operated by one man. The man would be standing on a work platform above the control rod drive mechanism housings. (Work would be done in parallel with other normal head area work.)

Modifications to the head lift rig or any head area components are not required for probe handling.

The reactor head area/control rod drive mechanism area is left completely unencumbered and servicing of the drive mechanisms and underside of the head may be performed without increased personnel radiation exposure and without risk of damage to the probes.

The weight of a handling canister is maintained at 1100 pounds, including the attenuating material.

A support bracket is provided on the handling canister compatible with the storage location. The storage location is on the south wall of Steam Generator B Cubicle.

A removable drop catcher is provided on the bottom of the handling canister to prevent water dripping while the canister is being transported from the reactor vessel to the storage area.

28/18 4.4-37 Rev. 31

ipment required to install the HJTCSP consists of (1) a probe holder shroud, (2) a modified mal sleeve, and (3) an upper probe housing.

re are two probe holder shrouds located in the upper internals assembly and they are similar in gn to control rod drive mechanism guide tubes. The shrouds support, vent, and shroud the CE CSP probe and probe holder and minimize the coolant flow between the upper head and er plenum inside the probe holder shroud assembly. The shroud consists of a lower and upper mbly that are bolted together. A probe holder, provided by CE, is inserted into the center of probe holder shroud. The probe holder is held in place at two (2) points. At the bottom of the be holder there is an interference fit between the shroud and the probe holder. At the top of the be holder the probe holder is welded to the upper assembly of the shroud. The shroud, with the supplied probe holder, is installed into the upper internals in a manner similar to the CRDM de tubes.

shroud is bolted to the upper support plate and has a support pin type arrangement at the om.

modified thermal sleeve is similar to the other thermal sleeves attached to the Vessel Head. It serted into the CRDM housing of the Reactor Vessel closure head and has a guide thread on bottom end. Its purpose is to aid during head insertion after a refueling operation and protect probe from flows in the upper head region.

upper probe housing consists of a tube with a CRDM housing adapter welded on one end and rayloc butt weld hub (provided by CE) on the other end. The adapter can be threaded onto the DM housing and seal-welded. The upper probe housing is part of the primary pressure ndary and extends from just above the seismic support platform to the reactor vessel head. The er probe housing provides the HJTCSP access into the vessel.

h ICC cabinet (Train A and B) has a qualified Class IE display system that includes the owing ICC information.

- Subcooled/superheat in °F (300°F subcooling to 45°F superheat).

- Core exit temperatures (200°F to 2300°F).

- Percent level in the plenum and head areas.

primary means of displaying all the ICC information is provided via the safety parameter lay system (SPDS). SPDS receives all the ICC transmitted data with optical isolation vided by ICC. SPDS has the capability to calculate subcooling/superheat based on primary lant temperatures, Thot, Tcold, CET, unheated junction temperatures of HJTC, and RCS sure. Signal validation techniques are utilized in the SPDS to ensure the quality of the input ables. SPDS displays are designed to incorporate accepted human factors principles so that displayed ICC information can be readily perceived and understood by plant operators during mal and abnormal plant conditions.

28/18 4.4-38 Rev. 31

l alarm.

7 REFERENCES FOR SECTION 4.4 1 Ainscough, J. B. and Wheeler, M. J. 1968. Thermal Diffusivity and Thermal Conductivity of Sintered Uranium Dioxide. In: Proceedings of the Seventh Conference of Thermal Conductivity, p 467, National Bureau of Standards, Washington, D.C.

2 Asamoto, R. R.; Anselin, F. L.; and Conti, A. E. 1968. The Effect of Density on the Thermal Conductivity of Uranium Dioxide. GEAP-5493.

3 ASME OMa-S/G-1991 Addenda to ASME OM-S/G-1990 Standards and Guides for Operation and Maintenance of Nuclear Power Plants, Part 12.

4 Bain, A. S. 1962. The Heat Rating Required to Produce Center Melting in Various UO2 Fuels. ASTM Special Technical Publication, Number 306, p 30-46, Philadelphia, Penn.

5 Basmer, P.; Kirsh, D.; and Schultheiss, G. F. 1972. Investigation of the Flow Pattern in the Recirculation Zone Downstream of Local Coolant Blockages in Pin Bundles.

Atomwirtschaft, 17, Number 8, 416-417 (In German).

6 Berlinger, C. (NRC) 1986. Letter to Rahe, Jr., E. P. (Westinghouse). Request for Reduction in Fuel Assembly Burnup Limit for Calculation of Maximum Rod Bow Penalty.

7 Boure, J. A.; Bergles, A. E.; and Tong, L. S. 1973. Review of Two-Phase Flow Instability.

Nuclear Engineering Design 25, p 165-192.

8 Bush, A. J. 1965. Apparatus for Measuring Thermal Conductivity to 2500°C.

Westinghouse Research Laboratories Report 64-1P6-401-43 (Proprietary).

9 Byron/Braidwood FSAR, Docket No. 50-456.

10 Clough, D.J. and Sayers, J. B. 1964. The Measurement of the Thermal Conductivity of UO2 Under Irradiation in the Temperature Range 150°1600°C. AERE-R-4690, UKAEA Research Group, Harwell.

11 Cohen, I.; Lustman, B.; and Eichenberg, D. 1960. Measurement of the Thermal Conductivity of Metal-clad Uranium Oxide Rods during Irradiation. WAPD-228.

12 Coplin, D. H. et al., 1968. The Thermal Conductivity of UO2 by Direct In-reactor Measurements. GEAP-5100-6.

28/18 4.4-39 Rev. 31

HW-69945.

14 Devold, I. 1968. A Study of the Temperature Distribution in UO2 Reactor Fuel Elements.

AE-318, Aktiebolaget Atomenergi, Stockholm, Sweden.

15 Dittus, F. W. and Boelter, L. M. K. 1930. Heat Transfer in Automobile Radiators of the Tubular Type. Calif. Univ. Publication in Eng., 2, No. 13, 443461.

16 Duncan, R. N. 1962. Rabbit Capsule Irradiation of UO2. CVTR Project, CVNA-142.

17 Feith, A. D. 1962. Thermal Conductivity of UO2 by a Radial Heat Flow Method.

TID-21668.

18 Godfrey, T. G.; Fulkerson, W.; Killie, T. G.; Moore, J. P.; and McElroy, D. L. 1964.

Thermal Conductivity of Uranium Dioxide and Armco Iron by an Improved Radial Heat Flow Technique. ORNL-3556.

19 Gonzalez-Santalo, J. M. and Griffith, P. Two-phase Flow Mixing in Rod Bundle Subchannels. ASME Paper 72-WA/NE-19.

20 Griffith, P.; Clark, J. A.; and Rohsenow, W. M. Void Volumes in Subcooled Boiling Systems. AMSE Paper No. 58-HT-19.

21 Gyllander, J. A. 1971. In-pile Determination of the Thermal Conductivity of UO2 in the Range 500-2500°C. AE-411.

22 Hetsroni, G. 1965. Studies of the Connecticut-Yankee Hydraulic Model. NYO-3252-2.

23 Howard, V. C. and Gulvin, T. G. 1960. Thermal Conductivity Determinations on Uranium Dioxide by a Radial Flow Method. UKAEA IG- Report 51.

24 Idelchik, I. E. 1960. Handbook of Hydraulic Resistance. AEC-TR-6630.

25 International Atomic Energy Agency 1966. Thermal Conductivity of Uranium Dioxide.

Report of the Panel Held in Vienna, April 1965, IAEA Technical Reports Series, Number 59, Vienna, The Agency, 1966.

26 Kakac, S.; Veziroglu, T. N.; Akyuzlu, K.; and Berkol, O. 1974. Sustained and Transient Boiling Flow Instabilities in a Cross-Connected Four-Parallel-Channel Upflow System.

Proc. of 5th International Heat Transfer Conference, Tokyo, September 3-7, 1974.

27 Kao, H. S.; Morgan, T. D.; and Parker, W. B. 1973. Prediction of Flow Oscillation in Reactor Core Channel. Trans. ANS, Vol. 16, 1973, p 212-213.

28/18 4.4-40 Rev. 31

Density Effects and Gap Conductance. HPR-80.

29 Kjaerheim, G. 1969. In-pile Measurements of Centre Fuel Temperatures and Thermal Conductivity Determination of Oxide Fuels. Paper IFA-175, presented at the European Atomic Energy Society Symposium on Performance Experience of Water-Cooled Power Reactor Fuel, Stockholm, Sweden, October 21-22, 1969.

30 Kruger, O. L. 1968. Heat Transfer Properties of Uranium and Plutonium Dioxide. Paper 11-N-68F, presented at the Fall Meeting of Nuclear Division of the American Ceramic Society, Pittsburgh, Penn.

31 Lahey, R. T. and Moody, F. J. 1977. The Thermal Hydraulics of a Boiling Water Reactor.

American Nuclear Society.

32 Lucks, C. F. and Deem, H. W. 1961. Thermal Conductivity and Electrical Conductivity of UO2. In: Progress Reports Relating to Civilian Applications, BMI-1448 (Rev) for June 1960; BMI-1489 (Rev) for December 1960; and BMI-1518 (Rev) for May 1961.

33 Lyons, M. F. et al., 1966. UO2 Powder and Pellet Thermal Conductivity During Irradiation. GEAP-5100-1.

34 Moody, L. F. 1944. Friction Factors for Pipe Flow. Transaction of the American Society of Mechanical Engineers, 66, 671-684.

35 Nelson, R. C.; Coplin, D. H.; Lyons, M. F.; and Weidenbaum, B. 1964. Fission Gas Release from UO2 Fuel Rods with Gross Central Melting. GEAP-4572.

36 Nishijima, T.; Kawada, T.; and Ishihata, A. 1965. Thermal Conductivity of Sintered UO2 and A12O3 at High Temperatures. J. American Ceramic Society, 48, 31 34.

37 Ohtsubo, A. and Urawashi, S. 1972. Stagnant Fluid due to Local Flow Blockage. J.

Nuclear. Science Technology, 9 No. 7, 433-434.

38 Rowe, D. S. and Angle, C. W. 1967. Crossflow Mixing between Parallel Flow Channels during Boiling, Part II Measurements of Flow and Enthalpy in Two Parallel Channels.

BNWL-371, Part 2.

39 Rowe, D. S. and Angle, C. W. 1969. Crossflow Mixing between Parallel Flow Channels during Boiling, Part III Effect of Spacers on Mixing between Two Channels. BNWL-371, Part 3.

40 Saha, P.; Ishii, M.; and Zuber, N. 1976. An Experimental Investigation of the Thermally Induced Flow Oscillations in Two-Phase Systems. J. of Heat Transfer, p 616-612.

28/18 4.4-41 Rev. 31

- Effect of Porosity. Trans. ANS, 13, 137-138.

42 Stora, J. P.; Debernardy, DeSigoyer, B.; Delmas, R.; Deschamps, P.; Ringot, C.; and Lavaud, B. 1964. Thermal Conductivity of Sintered Uranium Oxide under In-pile Conditions. EURAEC-1095.

43 South Texas FSAR, Docket No. 50-498.

44 Thadani, A. C. (NRC) 1989. Letter to Johnson, W. J. (Westinghouse). Acceptance for Referencing of Licensing Topical Report, WCAP-9226-9, WCAP-9227-NP, Reactor Core Response to Excessive Secondary Steam Releases.

45 Thom, J. R. S.; Walker, W. M.; Fallon, T. A.; and Reising, G. F. S. 1965-66. Boiling in Subcooled Water during Flowup Heated Tubes or Annuli. Prc. Instn. Mech. Engrs., 180, Pt. C, 226-46.

46 Tong, L. S. 1967. Prediction of Departure from Nucleate Boiling for an Axially Nonuniform Heat Flux Distribution. J. Nuclear Energy, 21, 241-248.

47 Tong, L. S. 1972. Boiling Crisis and Critical Heat Flux. AEC Critical Review Series, TID-25887.

48 Virgil C. Summer FSAR, Docket No. 50-395.

49 Vogt, J.; Grandell, L.; and Runfors, U. 1964. Determination of the Thermal Conductivity of Unirradiated Uranium Dioxide. AB Atomenergi Report RMB-527, 1964, Quoted by IAES Technical Report Series No. 59, Thermal Conductivity of Uranium Dioxide.

50 Weisman, J. 1959. Heat Transfer to Water Flowing Parallel to Tube Bundles. Nuclear Science Engineering, 6,78-79. 26.45.

51 WCAP-2923, 1966, Balfour, M. G.; Christensen, J. A.; and Ferrari, H. M. Inpile Measurement of UO2 Thermal Conductivity.

52 WCAP-3269-8, 1964, Hetsroni, G., Hydraulic Tests of San Onofre Reactor Model.

53 WCAP-3385-56, 1970, Nodvick, R. J., Saxton Core II Fuel Performance Evaluation.

Part, II, Evaluation of Mass Spectrometric and Radio- Chemical Analyses of Irradiated Saxton Plutonium Fuel.

54 WCAP-6065, 1965, Christensen, J. A.; Allio, R.J.; and Biancheria, A., Melting Point of Irradiated UO2.

55 WCAP-6069, 1965, Poncelet, C. G., Burnup Physics of Heterogeneous Reactor Lattices.

28/18 4.4-42 Rev. 31

57 WCAP-7912-P-A (Proprietary) and WCAP-7912-A (Non-proprietary), January 1975, McFarlane, A. F. Power Peaking Factors.

58 WCAP-7941-P-A (Proprietary) and WCAP-7959-A (Non-proprietary), 1975, Cadek, F.

F., et al., Effect of Axial Spacing on Interchannel Thermal Mixing with the R Mixing Vane Grid.

59 WCAP-8054-P-A (Proprietary) and WCAP-8195-a (Non-proprietary), February 1989, Hochreiter, L. E. Application of the THINC-IV Program to PWR Design.

60 WCAP-8174-P-A (Proprietary) and WCAP-8202-A (Non-proprietary), February 1975, Hill, K. W.; Motley, F. E.; and Cadek, F. F., Effect of Local Heat Flux Spikes on DNB in Non-uniformly Heated Rod Bundles.

61 WCAP-8218-P-A (Proprietary) and WCAP-8219-A (Non-proprietary), March 1975, Hellman, J. M. (Ed.) Fuel Densification Experimental Results and Model for Reactor Application.

62 WCAP-8296-P-A (Westinghouse Proprietary) and WCAP-8297 (Non- proprietary), 1975, Hill, K. W.; Motley, F. E.; Cadek, F. F.; and Wenzel, A. H., Effect of 17 x 17 Fuel Assembly Geometry on DNB.

63 WCAP-8298-P-A (Proprietary) and WCAP-8299-A (Non-proprietary), 1975, Motley, F.

E.; Wenzel, A. H.; and Cadek, F. F., The Effect of 17 x 17 Fuel Assembly Geometry on Interchannel Thermal Mixing.

64 Deleted by MP3-UCR-2014-013.

65 WCAP-8691, Revision 1 (Proprietary) and WCAP-8692, Revision 1 (Non-proprietary),

July 1979, Skaritka, J., (Ed.), Fuel Rod Bow Evaluation 66 WCAP-10851-P-A (Proprietary) and WCAP-11873-A (Non-proprietary) August 1988, Weiner, R. A. et al., Improved Fuel Performance Models for Westinghouse Fuel Rod Design and Safety Evaluations.

67 WCAP-11397-P-A, April 1989, Friedland, A. J. and Ray, S., Revised Thermal Design Procedure.

68 Kitchen, T. J., Generic Safety Evaluation for 17x17 Standard Robust Fuel Assembly (17x17 STD RFA), SECL-98-056, Revision 0, September 30, 1998.

69 Deleted (PKG FSC MP3-UCR-2013-005) 28/18 4.4-43 Rev. 31

Mixing Vane Grids.

71 WCAP-16617-P, September 2007, Westinghouse Revised Thermal Design Procedure Instrumentation Uncertainty Methodology - Millstone Unit 3 Nuclear Power Station.

72 WCAP-14565-P-A, October 1999, Suny, Y., et al., VIPRE-01 Modeling and Qualification for Pressurized Water Reactor Non-LOCA Thermal-Hydraulic Safety Analysis.

73 WCAP-13589-A, March 1995, Kersting, P. J., et al., Assessment of Clad Flattening and Densification Power Spike Factor Elimination in Westinghouse Nuclear Fuel.

74 WCAP-15063-P-A, Revision 1, July 2000, Slagle, W. H., et al., Westinghouse Improved Performance Analysis and Design Model (PAD 4.0).

75 Stewart, C. W., et al., VIPRE-01: A Thermal-Hydraulic Code for Reactor Cores, Volume 1 - 3 (Revision 3, August 1989, Volume 4 (April 1987), NP-2511-CCMA, Electric Power Research Institute.

76 WCAP-14565-A-P, Addendum 2-P-A, April 2008, Leidich, A.R. (Ed.) et al., Addendum 2 to WCAP-14565-P-A, Extended Application of ABB-NV Correlation and Modified ABB-NV Correlation WLOP for PWR Low Pressure Applications, (Proprietary).

77 WCAP-10444-P-A, 1985, Davidson, S.L., VANTAGE 5 Fuel Assembly Reference Core Report and Addendum 2-A, 1988, VANTAGE 5H Fuel Assembly.

28/18 4.4-44 Rev. 31

TABLE 4.4-1 THERMAL AND HYDRAULIC DESIGN PARAMETERS (1) rmal and Hydraulic Design Parameters Reactor Core Heat Output, MWt 3,650 Reactor Core Heat Output, 106 Btu/hr 12,454 Heat Generated in Fuel, % 97.4 Core Pressure, Nominal, psia 2,250 Radial Power Distribution (2) 1.65 [1 + 0.3 (1 - P)]

P Nominal Coolant Conditions sel Thermal Design Flow Rate (Including Bypass), 106 lbm/hr 135.3 sel Thermal Design Flow Rate (Including Bypass), gpm 363,200 e Flow Rate (3) (Excluding Bypass, Based on TDF):

106 lbm/hr 1237 gpm 331,965 e Flow Area, square feet:

RFA/RFA-2 (for full core of RFA/RFA-2 fuel) 51.1 e Inlet Mass Velocity 106 lbm/hr, ft2 (Based on TDF):

RFA/RFA-2 (for full core of RFA/RFA-2 fuel) 2.42 ssure Drop Across Core (psi) (4) 22.8 ssure Drop Across Vessel, Including Nozzle (psi) (4) 45.9 minal Vessel/Core Inlet Temperature, for TDF °F 556.4 sel Average Temperature, °F 589.5 e Average Temperature, °F 594.5 sel Outlet Temperature, °F 622.6 rage Temperature Rise in Vessel °F 66.2 rage Temperature Rise in Core °F 71.6 28/18 4.4-45 Rev. 31

ive Heat Transfer Surface Area, ft2:

(RFA/RFA-2) 59,700 rage Heat Flux, Btu/hr, ft2:

(RFA/RFA-2) 203,100 rage Linear Power, kW/ft 5.827 k Linear Power for Normal Operation, (5) kW/ft 15.15 perature at Peak Linear Power for Prevention of Centerline Melt, °F 4700 DNBR

SUMMARY

RFA/RFA-2 B Correlation (6) WRB-2M rrelation Limit (6) 1.14 sign Limit (Typ) 1.22 sign Limit (Thm) 1.22 fety Limit (Typ) 1.60 fety Limit (Thm) 1.60 nimum DNBR at Nominal Conditions (Typ) 2.31 nimum DNBR at Nominal Conditions (Thm) 2.27 Based on RFA/RFS-2.

1.65 represents the value of FNH used in the Safety Analysis. The FNH surveillance limit at Rated Thermal Power is specified in the COLR as 1.586. A 4% measurement uncertainty and truncation at the third decimal place is used to create the COLR limit (i.e.,

1.65 / 1.04 = 1.58653 = 1.586).

Based on design bypass flow of 8.6% without thimble plug assemblies.

Based on best estimate flow and thimble plugs removed.

Based on maximum FQ of 2.6.

The ABB-NV, W-3, and/or WRB-2 correlations, with the appropriate correlation limit corresponding to each correlation, are used for analyses in which the primary correlation (WRB-2M) is not applicable.

28/18 4.4-46 Rev. 31

DESIGN HOT CHANNEL FACTORS Average Maximum re (% void) 0.0 --

t subchannel (% void) 2.6 9.1 28/18 4.4-47 Rev. 31

Dose Rates Crud Activation Contribution Contribution Total rface of Canister Zone A .0007-.02 +.20 = 0.22 rface of Canister Zone B .007-.25 +0 = 0.25 rface of Canister Zone C .07-2.5 +0 = 2.5 Foot From Surface Zone A Insignificant +.05 = 0.05 Foot From Surface Zone B .125 +0 = 0.125 Foot From Surface Zone C .5-1.25 +0 = 0.51-1.25 TES:

Figure 4.4-21 for definition of zones.

10 rker dose in Shielded Zone for ten minutes = ------ ( .125R/hr ) = .021R 60 21mR 28/18 4.4-48 Rev. 31

28/18 4.4-49 Rev. 31 06/28/18 4.4-50 Rev. 31 DISTRIBUTION AT 4 FOOT ELEVATION 28/18 4.4-51 Rev. 31

DISTRIBUTION AT 8 FOOT ELEVATION 28/18 4.4-52 Rev. 31

DISTRIBUTION AT 12 FOOT ELEVATION-CORE EXIT 28/18 4.4-53 Rev. 31

28/18 4.4-54 Rev. 31 06/28/18 4.4-55 Rev. 31 MAP 28/18 4.4-56 Rev. 31

28/18 4.4-57 Rev. 31 28/18 4.4-58 Rev. 31 06/28/18 4.4-59 Rev. 31 SMALL BREAK LOCA 28/18 4.4-60 Rev. 31

06/28/18 4.4-61 Rev. 31 28/18 4.4-62 Rev. 31 28/18 4.4-63 Rev. 31 28/18 4.4-64 Rev. 31 28/18 4.4-65 Rev. 31 28/18 4.4-66 Rev. 31 28/18 4.4-67 Rev. 31 28/18 4.4-68 Rev. 31 28/18 4.4-69 Rev. 31 tion 4.5 provides a discussion of the materials employed in the control rod drive system DS) and for the reactor internals.

ore detailed evaluation of the reactor internals and reactivity control systems indicating the ree of conformance with the recommendations of the applicable Regulatory Guides is ented in Section 1.8:

1 CONTROL ROD SYSTEM STRUCTURAL MATERIALS 1.1 Materials Specifications parts exposed to reactor coolant are made of metals which resist the corrosive action of the ated water. Three types of metals are used exclusively: Stainless steels, nickel-chromium-iron, cobalt-based alloys. In the case of stainless steels, only austenitic and martensitic stainless ls are used. For pressure boundary parts, martensitic stainless steels are not used in the heat ted conditions which cause susceptibility to stress corrosion cracking or accelerated corrosion he Westinghouse pressurized water reactor water chemistry.

ssure boundary pressure retaining materials comply with Section III of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel e, and are fabricated from austenitic (300 series) stainless steel and Nickel-Chromium-Iron ys.

l stack assembly coil housings require magnetic material. Both low carbon cast steel and ductile iron have n successfully tested for this application. On the basis of performance, ductile iron was cted for the control rod drive mechanism (CRDM). The finished housings are zinc plated or e sprayed to provide corrosion resistance.

ls are wound on bobbins of glass reinforced silicon thermoset molding material, with double s-insulated copper wire. Coils are then vacuum impregnated with silicon resin. A wrapping of a sheet is secured to the coil outside diameter. The result is a well-insulated coil capable of ained operation at 200°C.

ch assembly gnetic pole pieces are fabricated from Type 410 stainless steel. All nonmagnetic parts, except and springs, are fabricated from Type 304 stainless steel. Haynes 25 is used to fabricate link

. Springs are made from nickel-chromium-iron alloy (Inconel 750). Latch arm tips are clad h Stellite-6 to provide improved wearability. Hard chrome plate and Stellite-6 are used ctively for bearing and wear surfaces.

28/18 4.5-1 Rev. 31

drive rod assembly utilizes a Type 410 stainless steel drive rod and Type 304 stainless steel onnect rod assembly. The coupling is machined from Type 403 stainless steel. Other parts are e 304 stainless steel with the exception of the springs, which are nickel-chromium-iron alloy, the locking button, which is Haynes 25.

erial specifications for Class 1 components of the CRDM are as follows:

CRDM, upper head SB-167 and SA-182, Grade F304 Latch housing SA-182, Grade F304 or SA-351, Grade CF8 Rod travel housing SA-182, Grade F304 or SA-336, Class F8 Cap SA-479, Type 304 lding materials EWth-2, ERN:Cr-3; and EN:CrFe-3 1.2 Austenitic Stainless Steel Components trols austenitic stainless steel materials used in the fabrication of CRDM components are cessed, inspected, and tested to avoid sensitization and prevent intergranular stress corrosion king.

rules covering these controls are stipulated in Westinghouse process specifications. As licable, these process specifications supplement the equipment specifications and purchase er requirements of every individual austenitic stainless steel component regardless of the ME Code Classification.

tinghouse practice is that austenitic stainless steel materials of product forms with simple pes need not be corrosion tested provided that the solution heat treatment is followed by water nching. Simple shapes are defined as all plates, sheets, bars, pipe and tubes, as well as ings, fittings and other shaped products which do not have inaccessible cavities or chambers would preclude rapid cooling when water quenched. When testing is required, the tests are ormed in accordance with ASTM A 262, Practice A or E, as amended by Westinghouse cess Specification 84201 MW.

uring the course of fabrication, the steel is inadvertently exposed to the sensitization perature range (800 to 1,500°F), the material may be tested in accordance with ASTM A 262, mended by Westinghouse Process Specification 84201 MW to verify that it is not susceptible ntergranular attack, except that testing is not required for:

1. Cast metal or weld metal with a ferrite content of 5 percent or more 28/18 4.5-2 Rev. 31

3. Material exposed to special processing provided the processing is properly controlled to develop a uniform product and provided that adequate documentation exists of service experience and/or test data to demonstrate that the processing will not result in increased susceptibility to intergranular stress corrosion.

If it is not verified that such material is not susceptible to intergranular attack, the material will be resolution annealed and water quenched or rejected.

ding welding of austenitic stainless steel is controlled to mitigate the occurrence of microfissuring ot cracking in the weld.

ilable data indicates that a minimum delta ferrite level expressed in ferrite number (FN),

ve which the weld metals commonly used by Westinghouse are not prone to hot cracking, lies ewhere between O FN and 3 FN. The undiluted weld deposits of the starting welding erials are required to contain a minimum of 5 FN.

1.3 Other Materials CRDMs are cleaned prior to delivery in accordance with the guidance of ANSI N45.2.2 ion in effect at time of manufacture. Westinghouse personnel do conduct surveillance to ure that manufacturers and installers adhere to appropriate requirements.

nes 25 is used in small quantities to fabricate link pins. The material is ordered in the solution ted and cold-worked condition. Stress corrosion cracking has not been observed in this lication over the last 35 years.

CRDM springs are made from nickel-chromium-iron alloy (Inconel 750) ordered to L-S-23192 Class A and D drawn wire. Operating experience has shown that springs made of material are not subject to stress-corrosion cracking.

1.4 Cleaning and Cleanliness Control CRDMs are cleaned prior to delivery in accordance with the guidance of ANSI N45.2.2 ion in effect at time of manufacture. Measures are taken, as appropriate, to apply packaging uirements to procurement orders, to review supplier packaging procedures, to apply proper ning requirements, marking and identification and to provide protection to equipment from sical or weather damage, to apply special handling precautions and to define storage uirements. Westinghouse Energy Systems Business Unit quality assurance procedures are cribed in the ESBU Quality Management System.

28/18 4.5-3 Rev. 31

2.1 Materials Specifications the major material for the reactor internals is Type 304 stainless steel. Parts not fabricated m Type 304 stainless steel include bolts and dowel pins, which are fabricated from Type 316 nless steel, and reactor vessel clevis insert bolts, and dowel pins which are fabricated from onel 750.

erial specifications for reactor vessel internals for emergency core cooling systems are shown able 5.2-3.

re are no other materials used in the reactor internals or core support structures which are not rwise supplied to the intent of the ASME Code,Section III, Appendix I.

2.2 Controls on Welding discussions provided in Section 4.5.1 are applicable to the welding of reactor internals and support components.

2.3 Nondestructive Examination of Wrought Seamless Tubular Products and Fittings nondestructive examination of pressure retaining wrought seamless tubular products and ngs is in accordance with Section III of the ASME Code.

2.4 Fabrication and Processing of Austenitic Stainless Steel Components aning of reactor internals and core support structures is in accordance with ANSI 45.2.2 ion in effect at time of manufacture.

28/18 4.5-4 Rev. 31

1 INFORMATION FOR CONTROL ROD DRIVE SYSTEM (CRDS)

CRDS includes the Control Rod Drive mechanisms (CRDMs) discussed in Section 3.9N.4.1, Rod Control System discussed in Section 7.7.1.2 and the Reactor Trip Switchgear discussed in tion 7.2.1.1.

ure 4.2-8 provides the layout of CRDS. The CRDS is a magnetically operated jack with no raulic system associated with its functioning. The CRDM consists of four separate assemblies.

1. The pressure vessel which includes the latch housing and rod travel housings

2. The coil stack assembly which includes three operating coils: stationary gripper coil, movable gripper coil, and lift coil

3. The latch assembly which includes the guide tube, the stationary and the movable pole pieces, and the stationary and movable gripper latches

4. The drive rod assembly which includes the coupling system and the drive rod Rod Cluster Control Assembly (RCCA) 2 EVALUATION OF THE CRDS CRDS has been analyzed in detail in a failure mode and effects analysis in WCAP-8976.

nges to the results of this analysis to account for timing changes to the Rod Control System described in WCAP-13864. These studies and the analyses presented in Chapter 15.0, onstrate that the CRDS performs its intended safety function, reactor trip, by putting the tor in a subcritical condition when a safety system setting is approached, with any assumed ible failure of a single active component. The essential elements of the CRDS (those required nsure reactor trip) are isolated from nonessential portions of the CRDS (the Rod Control tem).

pite the extremely low probability of a common mode failure impairing the ability of the tor trip system to perform its safety function, analyses have been performed in accordance h the requirements of WASH-1270. These analyses, documented in WCAP-7706-L and AP-8330 (1977), have demonstrated that acceptable safety criteria would not be exceeded n if the CRDS were rendered incapable of functioning during a reactor transient for which r function would normally be expected.

design of the control rod drive mechanism is such that failure of the control rod drive hanism cooling system will, in the worst case, result in an individual control rod drop or a full tor trip.

28/18 4.6-1 Rev. 31

CRDS is extensively tested prior to its operation. These tests may be subdivided into five gories: (1) prototype tests of components, (2) prototype CRDS tests, (3) production tests of ponents following manufacture and prior to installation, (4) onsite preoperational and, (5) al startup tests. In addition, the CRDS is subject to periodic inservice tests. These tests which described in Sections 3.9N.4.4, 4.2, and 14.2, and 16.3/4.1.3 (of the Technical Specifications) conducted to verify the operability of the CRDS when called upon to function.

4 INFORMATION FOR COMBINED PERFORMANCE OF REACTIVITY SYSTEMS is indicated in Chapter 15, the only postulated events which assume credit for reactivity trol systems other than a reactor trip to render the plant subcritical are the steam line break, water line break, and loss-of-coolant accident. The reactivity control systems for which credit ken in these accidents are the reactor trip system and the safety injection system (SIS). Note no credit is taken for the boration capabilities of the chemical and volume control system CS) as a system in the analysis of transients presented in Chapter 15. The adverse boron tion possibilities due to the operation of the CVCS are investigated in Chapter 15. Prior per operation of the CVCS has been presumed as an initial condition to evaluate transients, appropriate technical specifications have been prepared to ensure the correct operation or edial action.

5 EVALUATION OF COMBINED PERFORMANCE evaluations of the steam line break, feedwater line break, and the loss-of-coolant accident, ch presume the combined actuation of the reactor trip system to the CRDS and the SIS, are ented in Chapter 15. Reactor trip signals and safety injection signals for these events are erated from functionally independent and diverse sensors and actuate diverse means of tivity control, i.e., control rod insertion or injection of soluble poison.

diverse but redundant types of equipment are utilized only in the processing of the incoming sor signals into the Solid State Protection System logic, which initiates the appropriate ective action. In particular, note that protection from equipment failures is provided by undant equipment and periodic testing. Effects of failures of this equipment have been nsively investigated as reported in WCAP-8330 Westinghouse letter NS-TMA-2182 to the C and WCAP-8584. The failure mode and effects analyses described in these references verify any single failure will not have a deleterious effect on the engineered safety features actuation em.

6 REFERENCES FOR SECTION 4.6 1 WCAP-7706-L (Proprietary) and WCAP-7706 (Nonproprietary), July 1971, Gangloff, W.C. and Loftus, W.D., An Evaluation of Solid State Logic Reactor Protection in Anticipated Transients.

28/18 4.6-2 Rev. 31

3 WCAP-8584 (Proprietary) and WCAP-8760 (Nonproprietary), April 1976, Eggleston, F.T., Rawlins, D.H. and Petrow, J.R., Failure Mode and Effects Analysis (FMEA) of the Engineering Safeguard Features Actuation System, and Revision 1, February 1980, Mesneringer, J. C.

4 WCAP-8976, August 1977, Shopsky, W.E., Failure Mode and Effects Analysis (FMEA) of the Solid State Full Length Rod Control System.

5 WCAP-13864, September 1993. Baker T., Rod Control System Evaluation Program and Revision 1A, November 1994.

6 Anderson, T. M., ATWS Submittal, Westinghouse letter NS-TMA-2182 to S. H.

Hanauer of the NRC, December 1979.

28/18 4.6-3 Rev. 31